Home

Snapform Designer User Manual 5.x (English)

1. E Text field E Numeric field Date field E Masked input field E multiline text field Check box in Combo box G Password Field a Radio buttons group Table il 1D barcodes Aztec barcode Ml POF417 barcode E Datamatrix barcode BSI QRCode barcode The list of the menu elements is the same as in the vertical tool bar see 3 2 4 Line The Line tool is explained in section 4 3 5 1 Rectangle The Rectangle tool is explained in section 4 3 5 2 Cover The Cover tool is explained in section 4 3 5 3 Image The image tool is explained in section 4 3 5 4 3 15 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Label Hyperlink Info point Text field Numeric field Date field Masked input field Multiline text field Check box Combo box Password field Radio buttons group Table 1D barcodes Aztec barcode PDF417 barcode Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer The Label tool is explained in section 4 3 6 1 The Hyperlink tool is explained in section 4 4 8 1 The Info point tool is explained in section 4 4 8 2 The Text field tool is explained in section 4 4 2 2 The Numeric field tool is explained in section 4 4 2 4 The Date field tool is explained in section 4 4 2 5 The Masked input field tool is explained in section 4 4 2 6 The Multiline text field tool is explained in section 4 4 2 3 The Check box tool is explained in section 4 4 3 1 The Combo box
2. Controls Tools Find amp replace Form Page 1 a B a E i a i c al a 2 jz g 2 m a m lt ESI 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the cover area can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow Note When covers are superimposed it is possible that the element placed later appears to be below the earlier placed element The correct layering of the elements must be verified in the Preview mode The other features of the cover are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 32 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 32 Properties ofa cover Properties of Cover Property Value Name cropp Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Is oval Back color Name The name of the cover in the document This name can be changed Category Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23
3. Math functions part 1 Rounding Number 1 Number 2 Field name Nr_Number1 Field name Nr_Number2 Expression Result Explanation Round x Round Nr Numberl Rounds the entered value up or down to the next integer 3 Values smaller than 0 5 are rounded dount greater values are rounded up Ceil x I Nr _Numberl Rounds the entered value up to the next greater integer Floor x I _Numberl Rounds the entered value down to the next smaller integer Trunc x etl Rounds the Absolute of the entered value to the next smaller integer Cover x I _Numberl Rounds the Absolute of the entered value to the next greater integer Abs x Abs Nr_Numberl Calculates the Absolute of the entered value Min x y Returns the smaller of the two entered values Max x y s Returns the greater of the two entered values IncVersion inital_value step 4 Loop counter sets a counter to inital_value and increments it IneVersion 1 1 by step each time it is called To see how function IncVersion works Save the form and re open it Version number in the box above will increment more code Below the regular toolbar a new toolbar is displayed which contains the Actions which have been activated in the form settings Validation The Validation dialog see Fig 4 175 contains document settings which concern the validity of the form or its data Form settings o s 5
4. see func_table2 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 43 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 44 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference getVersion Special functions Returns the version number of the running Snapform application Designer Viewer This function has no arguments String Returns the version number of the running Snapform application Designer Viewer This number can be used to catch potential compatibility issues between different Snapform versions no related functions see func_ident qdf getYear date_value Date function Shows the number of the year of the date date_value date_value valid date Whole number Returns the number of the year of the entered date date_value The entered date may be in the future or in the past Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 45 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference This function is part of the inverse function of Date year month day getDay date_value getMonth date_value Date year month day other date functions see func_date qdf if logical_test value_if_true value_if_false Special functions Executes a comparison operation on the specified operands and returns a value depending on its res
5. 0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 440 480 620 560 600 0 OB G byrar 120 B e 200 C4 Eitiyitem number is Lb025 Ca Erec boxes On and OF 4 other font Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 44 Label examples of labels 1 qdfin the Snapform Viewer Chapter 4 Forms Development p Jlabels1 adf Snapform Viewer ih gt Q o 7x Li S Labels Part 1 Simple texts 1 Default 8 2 gt 5 N 2 3 2 Style Arial 14 8 z y S 9 ost parody 10 3 Leftaligned 11 My name is Snapform Snapform 4 Centered 5 zz Right aligned 12 My item number is 12 6 Multiline simple eitreantcied 13 Check box On and Off Xx 7 n 14 Another font Bold white on black amp lt 1 1 gt Lb000 Label default settings Lb001 Label font size specified in stylesheet Lb002 Label text left aligned background color green to visualize the field size non transparent Lb003 Label text centered background color green to visualize the field size non transparent Lb004 Label text right aligned background color green to visualize the field size non transparent Lb005 Label multiline text aligned to the top border of the field Lb006 Label font bold specified in stylesheet single line text aligned to the bottom border of the field Lb007 Label text rotated by 90 Lb008 Label text rotated by 180 Lb009 Label text rotated by 270 Lb010
6. 4 144 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 105 Examples from EE ee code39_family qdf Draft Preview in Draft mode EErEE e eee oer Fig 4 106 Examples from eee code39_family qdf Snapform Viewer code39_family qdf BASA eee in the Snapform viewer 1D Barcodes of the Code 39 group CODE 39 Code 39e CODE 39 Code 39e Ly Mil lll l va MII Il I Hi CODE 39R Code 39eX CODE 39 Code 39e CODE 93 Code 93ext CODE 93 Code 93ext Il Iii l l Mil AONUI CODE 93E0 Code 93ext_ CODE 93 Code 93ext lt 1 11 gt 4 145 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 107 Examples from numeric_family qdf in the Snapform Viewer Chapter 4 Forms Development Bc000 Code 39 text CODE 39 without check digit Bc002 Code 39 text CODE 39 with check digit Bc001 Code 39 Extended text CODE 39e without check digit Bc003 Code 39 Extended text CODE 39e with check digit Bc004 Code 93 text CODE 93 without check digit Bc006 Code 93 text CODE 93 with check digit Bc005 Code 93 Extended text CODE 93ext w
7. Another way to prepare the document particularly if no Acrobat Professional version is available but only Acrobat Standard or Acrobat Elements is to print out again with Acrobat Distiller This procedure often called refrying is normally not recommended but for this purpose it is a good method to simplify the document For this conversion the additional capabilities of PDF links fields structure are not necessary anyway Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development In the Distiller settings make sure that the fonts will be fully embedded also check these settings in the options for the printer driver 4 3 2 2 The user interface of the Snapform PDF Converter The Snapform PDF Converter is only available with a user interface in English After starting up the Snapform PDF Converter appears as shown in Fig 4 1 Fig 4 1 The Snapform PDF Converter S Convert PDF to Snapform File View Batch conversion Help A The menu bar is shown in detail in Fig 4 2 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 2 The Snapform PDF Converter menu bar Fig 4 3 The File menu of the Snapform PDF Converter Open PDF file Open Snapform background layer Save as Snapform background layer Preferences Chapter 4 Forms Development Convert PDF to Snapform File View Batch conversion Help es The various menu elements are explained below Convert PDF to Sn
8. Controls View Tools Help Align gt Moal ote of Sz Same width Make same size a E k Ail Same height Spacing reprenen 97 Same size All selected elements get the same width as the reference element All selected elements get the same height as the reference element All selected elements get the same width and height as the reference element With the commands of this submenu see Fig 3 16 the spacing between the selected elements is adjusted The adjustment occurs between the horizontal or vertical center axis of the bounding box of the elements In order for this submenu to be active at least three elements must be selected Format Controls View Tools Help Align gt 100 The Diel Make same size gt TEEN o Equal horizontal spacing The vertical spacing between the horizontal center lines of the selected elements are changed to be equal The horizontal spacing between the vertical center lines of the selected elements are changed to be equal Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 3 User Manual Using the Snapform Designer 3 2 2 6 The Controls Menu Note The term Controls is used in various standards concerning form elements In this manual the term tool may also be used The Controls see Fig 3 17 contains all the tools to create form elements Fig 3 17 The Controls Menu Ez View Tools Help Pa Line Ye Rectangle F Cover Image El Label Hyperlink i 74 Info point
9. Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 14 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference Cover x Round x Floor x Trunc x see func_math1 qdf Cell table column row Table function Represents the value of the table cell of table table column column row row table Valid name of a table column Valid element name or column number of the table table row integer Varies depending on the format of the element for the column column Returns the value of the table cell located in the table table column column and row row The column column can either be called via its internal number see Abschnitt 4 4 7 2 or via the name of the defining field If this is not a valid column such as if the field is not part of the table the function returns null corresponding to an empty value The same is the case if the value of row is greater than the number of rows of the table Because the type of the returned value may not be predictable make sure when defining an expression that the result or its format can be processed in further expressions Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 15 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 16 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference getCol getRow getValues del
10. This property represents the index number of the symbol in the structurally chained group Valid values are between 1 and 16 This property is normally deactivated It gets activated when the Enable structured append property is activated It is possible to specify in advance the file name for the retrieved chained data That file name is specified in this property This property is normally deactivated It gets activated when the Enable structured append property is activated It is however optional and only needed when required by the actual application The document qrcode gdf see Fig 4 115 Draft mode and Fig 4 116 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows various examples of QRCode barcodes After selecting the barcode fields in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the expression if there is any 4 193 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development Fig 4 130 Examples of QRCode barcodes ee OO x Draft Preview from qrcode qaf in 020 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 480 480 600 520 a Draft mode GAAS means 4 140 440 480 Fig 4 131 Examples of a QRCode barcodes BHASA o im bo from qrcode qdf in S the Snapform 2D Barcodes QRCode Code Viewer
11. Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the barcode field Width of the barcode field in Points Note The actual width of the barcode depends on the actual number of characters and may therefore be considerably wider than the field itself The symbol is created starting from the upper left corner of the field It is therefore important to make sure there is sufficient blank space towards the right of the field Height of the barcode field in Points The background of the barcode is set to transparent no covering background color with this check box This property is unchecked by default Background color of the barcode field By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color 4 131 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Barcode color Barcode type Fig 4 104 List ofthe available 1D barcodes Chapter 4 Forms Development The background color is only applied when the Transparent check box is unchecked Color of the barcode By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color Note Standards for the respective barcodes may contain requirements concerning the colors to be used and should be referred to Also note that only the full colors Black Cyan Magenta and Yellow are printed as full color unle
12. j A Y Co J e J K b N Excellence in eForms x y A Snapform Designer User Manual SKS ri Viewer Designer eForms TT ra l s Ne C www snapform com SnapForm Designer 5 x User Manual Table of contents 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 1 Table of contents Introduction Welcome to the World of Snapform About this manual Users Conventions Representation in the Text Screenshots Remarks Covered Software Versions Snapform Components Snapform PDF Converter Snapform Designer Snapform Viewer Workflow and Management Tools API and SDK The QDF Document Format General QDF S QDF A Installation System Requirements Preparing the system Standard Installation Installing the Snapform Designer Installing the Snapform Viewer Installing the Snapform PDF Converter Registering Configuring the Snapform Designer Uninstalling Using the Snapform Designer Starting and Exiting the Application Starting the Application Exiting the Application Components of The Snapform Designer The Application Window Table of contents WO ONNADAUUUUNBWWNNNDN DAaAUBWWNDN WWN SnapForm Designer 5 x User Manual 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 4 3 2 2 5 3 2
13. Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For check boxes the stylesheet settings in the General settings are of importance 4 105 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Chapter 4 Forms Development Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is assigned automatically and is in the order of the field tab sequence beginning with 10 and incremented in steps of 10 The first field of the form has tab order value 10 the second the value 20 etc The tab order value can be changed so that a specific tabbing sequence can be created which has no relationship with the order the fields have been added When the box is checked the check box will be printed When the box is checked the check box is displayed on screen When this box is checked the check box must have been checked or unchecked at least once in order for the form to be valid more about validity of forms in section 4 8 4 2 Itis possible to specify a constant value for a check box but this does not make much sense Instead the expression which contr
14. This property defines the text to be displayed as supplemental code In order to display the supplemental code the according option 2 digit supplement or 5 digit supplement must also be selected The supplemental symbol is displayed only if the value consists of 2 or 5 digits This property is only active when the code type EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A or UPC E has been selected With the other code types it is ignored With the retail business codes EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E for printed products books periodicals it is possible to add 2 or 5 digit supplemental codes These supplemental codes are lower than the main symbol and the clear text line is above their symbol When one of this boxes is checked a supplemental code symbol consisting of 2 or 5 digits is added to the main symbol The value of this supplement is specified in the Supplement property This property is only active when the code type EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A or UPC E has been selected With the other code types it is ignored The UPC E code specification contain different encoding systems The default value is 1 This property is only active when the code type UPC E has been selected With the other code types it is ignored 1D barcodes supported in Snapform Snapform supports the 1D barcodes listed below This description shall be a short help for choosing the suitable symbology however referring 4 138 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Bar 39 Bar 39 E
15. count SubStr string start count Tan x TblValues table tbl start tbl_ end row_ start row_ end delimiter column column Time hour minute second TimeTotal table column 42 42 43 44 45 45 47 47 48 49 49 50 51 51 52 53 54 54 55 56 56 58 58 59 60 61 61 62 63 63 64 65 66 67 67 69 70 SnapForm Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 80 5 3 81 5 3 82 5 3 83 5 4 5 4 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 Today Total table column TrimStr string Trunc x Regular Expressions Overview table Snapform File Formats Form compressed QDF S Form open QDF A Form Template compressed QDF S Form Tempate open QDF A Background layer Field layer Data binary Data open The Snapform Schema API and Toolkits viii Table of contents 70 71 72 72 74 74 nAaounuwn fb sp N 1 _ Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 1 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Introduction Welcome to the World of Snapform Snapform is a comprehensive system for developing managing and interacting with electronic forms The Suite consists of several components The Snapform Designer is the development tool which is used to create the forms The Snapform Viewer is the client component for filling out and interacting with the forms The Snapform Workflow and Management Tools help managing forms and data Snapform uses the QDF file format whic
16. lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the masked input field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the masked input field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 73 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 73 Properties ofa masked input field Property Name Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder 10 Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 46 4674 Top 45 913 Width 96 00 Height 12 00 Read only Single use Field Tooltip text Horizontal alignment Mask Placeholder O OBB Only complete values Configure boxing Link to object The common properties of entry fields are described in section 4 4 2 1 The following properties are either specific for masked input fields or have additional information pertinent to the description of the common properties Stylesheet Formatting and presentation of the entry and the appearance of the field is controlled via the stylesheet see section 4 7 1 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Mask Placeholder Chapter 4 Forms Development
17. s behavior when data is entered When switching to the Draft mode all entered values are dropped and the fields are reset Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 1 Chapter 4 Forms Development Forms Development Introduction Forms development is the main objective of the Snapform Designer This chapter describes the various stages of the forms development process analysis base layout active elements logic securing deployment and management using the Snapform Designer This chapter is process based It covers the sequences for creating working eForms This uses several elements of the Designer The scripting language for creating actions and logic is covered in detail in chapter 5 Expression language reference The forms development process consists of the following stages 1 Analysis and planning 2 Creating the base layout 3 Adding the data entry and display fields and the active elements 4 Adding actions and business logic 5 Preparing for deployment 6 Deployment 7 Maintenance These steps are covered in this chapter in their own sections Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development Analysis and planning As in any development projects analysis and planning have a great impact on the success of the project Even if this stage is not directly connected with the use of the Snapform Designer it is so important that a few comments are necessary As part of the an
18. Checkform 3 2 4 3 2 5 Fig 3 22 The Editor window Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Opens the Stylesheet editor The Stylesheet editor is explained in section 47 1 Checks the form for inconsistencies and incorrect expression syntax and generate an error report see section 4 6 Controls bar The Controls bar has the same structure as the Controls menu For the elements of the Controls bar refer to section 3 2 2 6 Workspace Editor window The workspace see Fig 3 22 also called Editor window is the area in which forms are created and edited The workspace corresponds to the paper format specified when a page is created x Draft Preview 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 300 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 3 2 6 Fig 3 23 Representative example for a Properties window Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer The Editor window can be switched between the Draft mode and the Preview mode see section 3 3 Starting from the origin in the upper left corner there are scales with Points as measuring unit Clicking on the crosshair icon shows or hides crosshairs which can be very useful for positioning elements as well as measuring positions on an existing background image In Fig 3 22 the crosshair is active The Close icon in the right upper corner has the same function as the menu item File gt Close Properties windo
19. Locked Left Top Width Chapter 4 Forms Development Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence which is logical because the barcode is not an active element When the box is checked the Datamatrix barcode field will be printed When the box is checked the Datamatrix barcode field is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated in Datamatrix barcode fields and cannot be changed In this property of the Datamatrix barcode field the text to be encoded is entered Clicking on this property field opens the expression editor In most of the cases the value is the result of a calculation When this box is checked the Datamatrix barcode field gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the Datamatrix barcode field Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the Datamatrix barcode field Width of the bounding box of the Datamatrix barcode field If its value is smaller th
20. This property specifies the initial value of the line numbering in the selectors see Fig 4 132 Default value is 1 Only integers can be entered This property specifies the table called report or listing This table is displayed in print when the table in the form contains more logical rows than can be displayed It is also used as data entry table for phantom tables Clicking on for this property opens the configuration window see Fig 4 136 4 204 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 136 Configuration window for report table Column Taborder Width Chapter 4 Forms Development Configure report Column Tab Width Header INroo4 190 Number cbooz 240 Tx00S 200 Lbo19 Lbo1s Nroos Unit price jooonoOR Options Column for message Style For report title Arial 10 Style For report headers Arial 10 Print report after page 1 bh Orientation Portrait Landscape The configuration window consists of two zones the table definition and the report properties The table definition zone is a five column table to specify the listing table Name of the form element of the according column Attention When the name of the column is changed in this table the name of the form element gets changed too This might lead to errors in expression Order number of the form element of the according column Attention The order number not only controls the ta
21. 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the QRCode barcode field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the 4 185 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the QRCode barcode field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 129 4 186 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 129 Properties of a QRCode barcode field Name Properties of GRCode barcode Property Value Name Beqooo Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 53 1461 Top 46 3453 Width 96 00 Height 96 00 Title Transparent Back color Barcode color Stretch content Encoding Correction level Version AuboconFigurate FHMC 1 Module size Enable structured append Structured append identifier Structured append index Structured append total be changed 4 187 Chapter 4 Forms Development The name of the ORCode barcode field in the document This name can Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Chapter 4 F
22. 3 g A 8 Serverside Interaction mB Validation Form expiry Expiry date New Form URL Warning message Invalid form Validation rule Warning message Incomplete form Warning message After expiry date the Form turns read only Co 4 274 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 4 1 Expiry date New form URL Warning message 4 8 4 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development The Validation dialog is subdivided into three areas Form expiry Invalid form and Incomplete Form Form expiry It is possible to add an expiration date to the form This is particularly useful when the data contained in the form is relevant for a specific time frame and a different form must be used for later dates In this field the expiration date is entered The date is compared with the system clock of the host computer and when the current date is after the expiration date the form will be opened in read only mode and no more entries can be made If a stronger expiration date control is required rather than using the system clock an external solution must be used Ringler Informatik AG provides support for the implementation of such solutions When an expiration date is specified it is highly recommended to provide a reference to the currently valid form This reference may be a URL which is specified in this field When an expired form is opened
23. Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer If there is already a document open it will be closed first If there are unsaved changes a dialog appears asking whether the document should be saved see Fig 3 10 Saves the form under its existing name An older version of the file will be overwritten Opens the normal print dialog provided by the operating system This icon allows you to set the zoom factor for displaying the form in the Editor window Moving the marker changes the numeric zoom indicator and the form will be displayed accordingly It is also possible to directly enter a percentage value The zooms range is adjustable from 25 to 400 Scales the view of the active document so it completely fits into the Editor window Scales the view of the active document so it fits the width of the Editor window This icon allows navigation through a multi page document Clicking on one of the arrow icons displays the previous or next page The current page and the total number of pages are listed between the arrow icons It is also possible to enter the page number you want to navigate to directly into the display field The selected elements are copied to the clipboard and removed from the workspace Form elements retain all their properties except tab order Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Copy B Paste amp Delete Undo Redo Drop down icon Align Left Center Right Top Chapter 3
24. If this is not the case there will be mis matches between element name and return value This function allows you to dynamically assemble selection lists It is for example possible to transfer table contents into a selection list for further usage getSelectedIndex ComboBox see func_combobox qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 64 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 65 Category Short description Chapter 5 Expression language reference setPagePrintable true false page_number page_number Status function Sets the printable property of the affected page s true false status value true or false page_number page number or group of page numbers separated with commas The page property is set Sets the printable property of one or several pages page_number to true or false This corresponds to the checking or unchecking of the printable checkbox in the Properties dialog of the affected page see Abschnitt 4 3 4 2 Fig 4 18 setPageVisible true false page_number page_number see func_status qdf setPageVisible true false page_number page_number Status function Sets the visible property of the affected page s Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 66 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5
25. Infotext Infotext Infotext Infotext Infolexi Infotext Infotext Infotest Infolex Infotext Infotext Infotast Infotext Infoteaxt Infotex Infotex J 6 i 8 Position right top aligned Position bottom left aligned Position left top aligned Position bottom right aligned Position left bottom aligned Position top right aligned Position top left aligned 4 236 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development 8 Position right bottom aligned Note The info text is rendered beyond the border of the form However parts outside the document will be cut off It is recommended that you always verify the info text in the Preview mode of the Snapform Designer where different assumed zoom factors should be selected The document infopoints gdf see Fig 4 163 Draft mode and Fig 4 164 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows various examples of infopoints The following picture see Fig 4 165 shows the activated info texts the image has been assembled from various parts using image processing software it is not possible to open several infopoints at the same time After selecting the infopoint field in Snapform Designer the properties window displays information about the according properties Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the Text property and double clicking the Info text details property field shows the info text 4 237 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms D
26. Installation Installation System Requirements In order for Snapform to be installed and to run properly a few system requirments must be fulfilled The Snapform Viewer will run on any platform Windows Macintosh Unix where Sun Java Runtime 1 4 or newer is running This means for Windows Windows ME Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista For Macintosh OS X 10 1 and newer For the Snapform Designer there are some limitations which do not allow for Linux support For the Snapform Designer either Windows variants see above or Mac OS X 10 2 8 or newer are required The small footprint of the Snapform Viewer and the Designer do not require a specific amount of memory and disk space Under low memory conditions the working speed will be limited The Snapform PDF Converter requires Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Vista Intel based Macintoshes with virtual machines running one of the mentioned Windows variants will work as well Further hardware consists if paper based workflows are planned of a printer with a resolution of at least 300 dpi If barcodes with small module sizes are used 600 dpi or higher is recommended For applications using PKI a signature card reader with touchpad may be necessary On the back end side for paper based workflows readers for barcodes may be needed The performance of these devices depends on the amount of forms to be processed Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual System
27. Stretch content Codabar Start char and Codabar Stop char Code 128 Char set Check char Chapter 4 Forms Development to the data are shown which are necessary when the barcode information is entered manually When this box is checked the symbol is scaled so that it completely fills the barcode field This property is not active by default Attention Scaling a symbol to the fields dimension may lead to bar widths which are beyond the specification and the symbol may be unreadable This property must be used with great care and understanding of the barcode used in the application The Codabar code has Start and Stop characters which may occur only at the beginning and the end of the code see description in section 4 4 5 2 These characters are named A B C and D and may be used for payload purposes to some extent Start and Stop character may be the same or different These two properties are only active when the Codabar code type has been selected When this property is selected a drop down menu opens with the selection A B C D Default values are Start character A and Stop character B The Code 128 code as well as the technically identical EAN 128 code uses three different character sets A B and C see description in section 4 45 2 With this property the character set used at the beginning of the code is specified A change of character set within the code is marked automatically This property is only a
28. The value of Row height must be greater than the height of the elements of the logical row in order to prevent overlapping elements when the table is displayed As only one single row is displayed the value for the row height should be in the range of the height of the table container 2 Activate buttons to open the data entry table As the table displays only one single row the capabilities for entering data are limited This is why the actual data entry and screen display occurs in the data entry table This table is opened by clicking on a button see Fig 4 142 Editor pa Draft Preview f a 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 A 260 300 310 This button gets activated when in the Configure table dialog one or several Show total boxes are checked The button appears to the left of the specified field element The size depends on the height of that element as the example in Fig 4 142 shows Specifying the data entry table 4 214 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development The data entry table is screen oriented and it cannot be printed its equivalent is the report It can be specified to some extent Certain properties are used by the data entry table and the report The first property of the data entry table is the title which is entered in the Header text property Further entries are in the Configure table window see Fig 4 136 In the report specificat
29. This check box controls whether the current page can be printed or not When selecting this property the path to a graphic file can be specified which will be inserted as a background image When there are already inserted background images their names are listed in a drop down menu The topmost element of the drop down menu is empty and has the meaning of no image Selecting this element removes an already inserted background image from the page Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 19 File Open dialog for background image Chapter 4 Forms Development The button opens a File Open dialog to select the file to be imported see Fig 4 19 Select an image in Prodok i PES Adler 300dpi png Adler 600dpi png File name Adler 600dpi png Files of type Image files jpg bmp jpeg wbmp png gif Graphic files of the formats JPEG BMP TIFF GIF and PNG can be imported as background images Other graphic formats in particular vector based formats must first be converted rendered into one of the listed formats The imported background image is scaled to completely fill the page which means that its proportions are not maintained Helpful Hint When the background image is printed out be aware that the JPEG format may show artifacts in line art or text images These artifacts will appear as spots in the printout line art or text images should be
30. Width of boxes Fig 4 76 Segmented entry field in Draft mode Fig 4 77 Segmented entry field in Preview mode 4 4 2 7 Fig 4 78 Password field with entry in Preview mode Fig 4 79 Password field cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development The width of a box for the individual characters measured in Points Default value is 11 3 pt The mask for the example in Fig 4 75 is O H H H As the spaces between the boxes can be individually controlled the mask itself does not need space characters for the formatting The resulting field in Draft mode is shown in Fig 4 76 and filled out in Preview mode in Fig 4 77 Ce DB FEE bee Password fields There are entries which must not be visibly displayed such as passwords For this kind of entry password fields are used Password fields are essentially text fields where the display of the entered characters is suppressed Instead of the entered character a big dot is shown Fig 4 78 shows a password field with entered data in Preview mode ececoo The Password field tool creates a field which suppresses the entry in the clear and displays a replacement character instead After selecting the tool a cursor with a Password field element in default size appears see Fig 4 79 a Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 80 Newly created password field Chapter 4 Forms Development Assigned to the Password field tool is a password field 96 pt wide and 12 pt high Cl
31. all other properties in the Properties dialog become inactive Access to these properties is resumed only after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the line Note For a precise positioning of the line s center half of the line s width must be taken into account Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the line Note For a precise positioning of the line s center half of the lines width must be taken into account Width of the bounding box of the line With a horizontal line this is the same as the length of the line with a vertical line it is the same as the line s width Height of the bounding box of the line With a horizontal line this is the same as the width of the line with a vertical line it is the same as the line s length Color of the line By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color Width of the line in Points Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Direction Fig 4 24 Direction drop down menu in Line properties Horizontal Vertical Diagonal left Diagonal right Dash size Honor border width Chapter 4 Forms Development Selecting this property opens a drop down menu with the possib
32. between 1 and 1 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 3 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference numeric is between 0 and 180 Returns the Arccosine of the argument in degrees When the argument is greater than 1 or smaller than 1 the calculation is not possible and a special icon is shown in the field showing the result Cos x Asin x Atan x Sin x Tan x other Math functions see func_math2 qdf addDay date_value number Date function Calculates the date which is from the date date_value away by number of days date_value valid date number integer Date Returns the date which is by number of days apart from the specified date date_value The date argument can be in the future or the past A positive number for number means that the returned date is in the future from the entered data and a negative number means that it is in the relative past For calculations from the current date it is possible to use as the value for date_value the function Today If the value for number has numbers after the decimal sign they will be ignored Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 4 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference In order to display the result an accordingly formatted date field
33. column StrTotal table column see func_table2 qdf Today Date function Returns the current date This function has no arguments Date Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Explanation See also Example 5 3 81 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference Returns the current date In order to display it a date field formatted as date is necessary getDay date_value getMonth date_value getYear date_value and other date oriented date functions see func_date qdf Total table column Table function Sums up the values of the column column table Table name column Column number or field name of the column from which the values are to be summed up Number sums the field values of the column up and returns the resulting sum It is important to make sure that the column column is actually a Number field TimeTotal table column StrTotal table column see func_table1 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 82 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 83 Category Short description Arguments Result Chapter 5 Expression language reference TrimStr string String function Removes preceding and trailing spaces from a string string String may have preceding and trailing spaces String Removes preceding and trailing spaces f
34. even with small amount of data Compact means that the symbol is always displayed in the compact form Attention When the option Compact is selected and the amount of data gets too big the symbol is displayed as a grey area This is the size of a module the smallest unit of the Aztec barcode Measuring unit is Point and the default value is 2 This value should not be much smaller as otherwise there may be problems in printouts Note When the Stretch content property has been selected the Module size value is overridden This is the minimum part of error correction information encoded in the symbol in percent of the total amount of information The default value is 23 This value is sufficient for most applications and allows the correct data retrieval even if up to a quarter of the symbol cannot be read correctly Applicable values range from 5 to 95 It is possible to define a series of specific symbols which have a certain meaning defined on application level Such a symbol contains a control sequence and an order number between 0 and 255 This kind of symbol is called rune Default value for this property is 1 which has the meaning of deactivated Applicable values are integers between 0 and 255 When an applicable value has been chosen it will be encoded and any values from the Value property will be ignored In addition the compact version of the symbol is automatically used even if the Configuration t
35. 2 Bca001 Aztec barcode Configuration type Compact Stretch content on 3 Bca002 Aztec barcode Configuration type Automatic Stretch content off smaller field 4 Bca003 Aztec barcode Configuration type Automatic Stretch content on Rune 4 All four barcodes represent the text specified in the entry field according to the specific properties In the example file the text can be changed and the symbols change accordingly PDF 417 Barcode The PDF 417 barcode is a high density layered 2 dimensional symbology The data capacity is 1800 alphanumeric characters or 1100 binary characters per symbol The encoded data is available in rows which begin with a Start character then have a certain number of data characters and end with a Stop character This leads to the typical column structure The number of data character can vary as well as the number of rows minimum 3 maximum 90 The data is represented in code words A code word consists of four bars and four blanks which are distributed over 17 modules With increasing amount of data the symbol grows in direction of the columns as more rows are added When planning a form be sure that there is sufficient free space for this kind of growth There is also a necessity for white space around the symbol so that it can be properly read PDF 417 has various error correction levels With the highest setting maximum number of error correction code words only about half of
36. 2 1 Note Tooltip text should be short Therefore it is advised to avoid entering excessive HTML formatting and inserting images When this box is checked it is possible to enter an additional value to the available list This value remains in the field until a new selection is made This value is not added to the selection list and when the selection is changed it will be lost When this box is checked the selection value is shown with the list value when the combo box is opened see Fig 4 97 box unchecked and Fig 4 98 box checked Element 1 Element 2 k Element 1 2 Element 2 a 3 When this box is checked the button right of the Combo box field which is normally shown and indicates that there is a combo box is hidden This button will then appear only when the field is active This property defines how the entered or displayed text is horizontally aligned in the combo box 4 122 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Number value Configure list Fig 4 99 Configuration window for selection list Include values Items Chapter 4 Forms Development When the property field is clicked a drop down menu appears with the options left center right which places the text left aligned centered or right aligned within the combo box Default is left When this box is checked the selection value must be a number In this property the actual selection list is specified The list value mu
37. 2 6 3 2 2 7 3 2 2 8 3 2 2 9 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 3 2 7 1 3 2 7 2 3 2 7 3 3 2 8 3 2 9 3 2 9 1 3 2 9 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 1 1 4 3 1 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 3 2 4 4 3 2 5 4 3 2 6 4 3 3 Table of contents Menu bar The Apple Menu Macintosh specific 4 4 The Snapform Designer Menu Macintosh specific 4 The File Menu The Edit Menu The Format Menu The Controls Menu The View Menu The Tools Menu The Help Menu Toolbar Controls bar Workspace Editor window Properties window Tools window Controls Tools Find and Replace Expression editor Other user interface components Keyboard Shortcuts Color picker Operation modes of The Snapform Designer Draft mode Preview mode Forms Development Introduction Analysis and planning Base layout Background images Snapform PDF Converter Conversion Service The Snapform PDF Converter Preparing the PDF documents 7 9 12 15 17 17 18 19 23 23 24 25 25 25 26 28 30 30 30 33 33 33 4 Up PHRRNO uw The user interface of the Snapform PDF Converter 7 Preferences Converting a single document Batch conversion Conversion problems Creating anew document 11 12 12 14 15 SnapForm Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 3 1 4 3 3 2 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 1 4 3 4 2 4 3 5 4 3 5 1 4 3 5 2 4 3 5 3 4 3 5 4 4 3 6 4 3 6 1 4 3 6 2 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 2 1 4 4 2 2 4 4 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 4
38. Add row Delete row Chapter 4 Forms Development a fl Saldo Data entry into the table is done like entering data into a typical spreadsheet The data entry table has a toolbar consisting of 6 tools see Fig 4 144 4 En E a Gl E The Cut tool removes the current row and puts it in the clipboard The subsequent rows move up one position The Copy tool copies the current row in the clipboard The Paste tool inserts the row stored in the clipboard at the end of the table The Add row tool inserts a new empty row above the active row The Delete row tool deletes the active row from the table The Delete table tool deletes the contents of the data entry table and removes all the rows 4 Specifying the detail report In phantom tables an additional page is created when the document is printed This additional page is called report This 4 216 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development report is a very simply designed table which must be configured Certain properties of this table are used in common with the data entry table and do not need to be configured any further The report is only displayed in the Print preview As the Snapform Designer cannot create a Print preview the form must be saved and then displayed in the Snapform Viewer At this time the Print preview can be created by clicking on the Print preview tool Moving to the following pa
39. Cancel Reset The color picking window is opened by clicking on the color bar in the Properties window In the color selection mode using Swatches the color is selected by clicking on the according swatch For each of these fields the mouse tip displays the RGB values for the associated color In the Preview zone the effect of the color selection is shown as border and background of a field against field fill color and against borders in white and black as well as text color on a grey and white background and as a background for black text The selected color is activated by clicking on OK Fig 3 30 Color picker in HSB view Pick a color Swatches HSB RGB a Oo Sample Text Sample Text Ba E E Sample Text Sample Text OK Cancel Reset lt gt lt gt lt gt Preview Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 3 31 Color picker in HSB view Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer When selecting the color in the HSB view the hue of the color is set using the vertical color spectrum slider in the middle of the window The saturation can set by clicking the appropriate place in the resulting colored square at the left The current HSB and RGB values are displayed in the fields at the right HSB values can also be entered directly into the entry fields H S B or increased or decreased using the Up Down arrow icons Values for H are between 0 and 360 and for S and B they can be between 0 and 1
40. Category L 1 l l i 1 L l l i 1 1 1 1 o Stylesheet Default 10 A Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Read only Single use field Tooltip text Print border Linkto object Controls Tools Find amp replace Form BHHBEHe Fhe aeg 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the check box can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the check box are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 86 4 104 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 86 Properties ofa check box Name Category Stylesheet Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Check box Property Value Mame cbogg Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder 10 Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 38 764 Top 29 4944 Width 12 00 Height 12 00 Read only Single use field Tooltip text Print border Link to object m m The name of the check box in the document This name can be changed
41. Chapter 4 Forms Development The document structure shows in the example the association of the form elements Tx000 and Dt000 to the table container Tab1e000 Form elements which were present in the form before the table container was placed cannot be added to the group of table elements It is not possible to add form elements which have first been placed outside of the table container into the table container Field elements belonging to a table container must be placed within its perimeter in order to be displayed properly They can not be moved outside of the table container When a table container is moved or scaled the associated elements retain their relative position This means that it is sufficient to move the table container when a table has to be placed elsewhere on the page Helpful Hint As every element placed within a table container no matter whether intentional or not is added to the table it may be recommended to lock the table container Locked property checked for the on going development work with the form After creating the master row which may consist of more than one visual row the table must be configured The following steps are intended for tables consisting of multiple rows phantom tables which consist of one single row are discussed below Helpful Hint t is recommended to regularly verify the results of the actions described below in the Preview mode 1 Adjust the value of Row height
42. Controls View Tools Help aHoaea a foo O 11 YRBBORanwe B 2 Editor x ae Property Draft Preview _ c Name Ee m o oo en wo in 0 mo 200 aao aa ao an mo s 200 200 II category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form G Page 1 om Tx000 Tab 10 Dt000 Tab 20 E choos tab 30 4 vo E a E a 3 j 121 a g 2 g 2 2 2 2 B Jox lt BEEE 176 2007 Ringler Informatik AG A Group is a form element into which other form elements can be placed The main purpose of a group is to freeze the relative position of the grouped form elements The following properties can be changed for a group Name The name of the group This name can be changed Locked When this check box is selected the group gets locked and can not be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box 3 11 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Left Top Ungroup Regroup Add new page Insert new page Delete this page 3 2 2 5 Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric pos
43. E lz g a g 2 al EEE BI lt x Properties of Date field Single use field Tooltip text Horizontal alignment Minimum date Maximum date Configure boxing Link to object Value bto00 Default 10 46 4674 40 7609 96 00 12 00 Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG Chapter 4 Forms Development The length and the width of the date field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the date field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 69 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 69 Properties ofa date field Stylesheet Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Date Field Property Value Name Brood Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder 10 Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 46 4674 Top 40 7609 Width 96 00 Height 12 00 Read only O OBIS Single use Field Tooltip text Horizontal alignment Date Format Minimum date Maximum date Configure boxing
44. Expression language reference true false status value true or false page_number page number or group of page numbers separated with commas The page property is set Sets the visible property of one or several pages page_number to true or false This corresponds to the checking or unchecking of the visible checkbox in the Properties dialog of the affected page see Abschnitt 4 3 4 2 Fig 4 18 setPagePrintable true false page_number page_number see func_status qdf setPrintable category_list true false Status function Sets the printable property of the affected category s category_list String with a list of comma separated categories true false Status value true or false The field property for the fields of the according category is set Sets the printable property of the fields belonging to the categories specified in category_list to true or false This corresponds to a Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 67 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference simultaneous checking or unchecking of the printable checkbox in the Properties dialog of all those fields setVisible category_list true false setWritable category_list true false see func_status qdf setSelectedindex ComboBox index Special functions Sets the current selection of the List field ComboBox to the value
45. Manual Fig 4 74 Active masked input field in Preview mode Only complete values Configure boxing Fig 4 75 Configuration window for field boxing in masked input fields Boxing mode Distance between boxes Chapter 4 Forms Development When this box is checked an entry is only committed when it is complete which means that all placeholder characters must have been replaced with an entry An incomplete entry gets discarded In masked input fields the boxing occurs always for each individual character including the constant characters of the mask This kind of fields is also called comb fields Clicking on for this property opens the configuration window see Fig 4 75 Configure boxing Boxing mode Distance between boxes 1 50 1 50 1 50 1so jiso 1so 1s0 width of boxes 11 30 The configuration window for field boxing allows you to set the following properties This check box activates and deactivates the field boxing When the box is checked the field gets boxed when it is unchecked the field does not get boxed Distance between the boxes for the individual characters in Points The default value is 1 5 pt For masked input fields the distance between the boxes can be individually set The number of fields for the distance values depends on the mask definition Helpful Hint t is recommended to verify the settings at a high zoom factor Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual
46. Name The name of the line in the document This name can be changed Category Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 23 The Assign categories dialog The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For lines the stylesheet definition has however no relevance Taborder Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence which is logical because the line is not an active element Printable When the box is checked the line will be printed Visible When the box is checked the line is displayed on screen Required This property is always deactivated and cannot be changed Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Value Locked Left Top Width Height Color Line width Chapter 4 Forms Development Clicking on this field opens the expression editor for assembling an expression For Line elements an expression is however used very rarely When this box is checked the line gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition
47. Open Form Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer This is the link to the support page on the Snapform website http support snapform com help designer asp language EN Opens the window for entering the license key see section 2 4 This menu item opens a window containing information about the Snapform Designer This window has two selectable options The Snapform Designer window displays the version information of the installed program and the licensing information see Fig 3 6 The System information window displays an overview of the system environment relevant to the Snapform Designer see Fig 3 7 This information can be useful for debugging purposes Toolbar The toolbar see Fig 3 21 contains tool icons for the most important actions with forms The majority of the tool buttons are also available as menu action 92084 O mw io O77 gt KBAR Hm B S 8 h BO The individual tools are explained below The toolbar can be torn off the window and then appear as its own window on screen When this window gets closed the toolbar will reappear in the main window This icon opens the specification window for a new form This function is explained in section 4 3 3 Opens an Open file dialog where the requested qdf document is selected Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Save Form E Print Form amp Zoom slider A 98 Fit window Fitwidth Page navigation 2 3 Cut amp
48. Professional Acrobat 6 or newer or Acrobat full version Acrobat 5 and older The following instructions are based on Acrobat 7 Professional In the first step any security setting must be removed The further preparation is done with the PDF Optimizer menu Advanced gt PDF Optimizer The following settings are recommended Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development 1 Lower the resolution of images to 150 dpi color and grayscale or 600 dpi b w 2 No further optimizing of scanned pages 3 Embed fonts as far as possible note that the font files must be installed on the computer used for the conversion 4 Do not flatten transparent objects 5 Inthe Remove Objects tab select all options 6 In the Clean up tab Remove object compression and select all options except Optimizing for fast web view These options ensure that the document is prepared optimally for the Snapform PDF Converter Note With dynamic forms make sure that all required form elements are displayed and then flatten the document In order to accomplish this open Acrobats Debugger lt Ctrl gt lt J gt or lt Cmd gt lt J gt and enter the following line of code this flattenPages and execute it with lt Ctrl gt lt Return gt If there are several documents to be converted the prepared PDF files can be copied to a specific directory This will then allow the Snapform PDF Converter to operate in batch mode
49. Required Value Locked Left 55 4348 Top 43 0978 Width 192 00 Height 43 00 Transparent Back color Barcode color Stretch content Unit width crn Unit height iem of columns Rows Error correction level Compaction Part of macro Macro ID Macro units count Macro unit number Name The name of the PDF 417 barcode field This name can be changed Category Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 4 166 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Chapter 4 Forms Development The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence which is logical because the barcode is not an active element When the box is checked the PDF 417 barcode field will be printed When the box is checked the PDF 417 barcode field is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated in PDF 417 barcode fields and cannot be changed In this property of the PDF 417 barcode field the text to be encoded is entered
50. Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 171 The Stylesheet editor Tables tab Chapter 4 Forms Development Infopoint title contains the settings for the title bar of opened infopoints Infopoint panel contains the settings for the display area of infopoints Hyperlink contains the settings for hyperlinks Besides the setting for background color and text color the setting for the Active color can be specified which is applied when the link is active clicked on amp Stylesheet editor List of stylesheets Properties 1 Default 8 General settings Input controls amp labels InFopoint and hyperlinks Tables 2 Default 9 Tables 4 Default 11 5 Default 12 Current row background color Transparent E Alpha 6 Default 14 7 Default 16 Current row border color hay J Alpha 8 Default 18 9 Detak 6 Bold Selected row background color Transparent E Alpha 10 Default 9 Bold Selected row border color NNN C Alpha 11 Default 10 Bold 12 Default 11 Bold 13 Default 12 Bold 14 Default 14 Bold Counter color default J Alpha I I Arh E e 15 Default 16 Bold 16 Default 18 Bold 17 Default 8 Italic 18 Default 9 Italic 19 Default 10 Italic 20 Default 11 Italic 21 Default 12 Italic 22 Default 14 Italic 23 Default 16 Italic 24 Default 18 Italic Counter color active G fT A Ea Counter color selected new clone __ Delete In the Tables settings the color for the background of the row an
51. The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For covers the stylesheet definition has however no relevance Taborder Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Is oval Chapter 4 Forms Development tabbing sequence which is logical because the Cover is not an active element When the box is checked the cover will be printed When the box is checked the cover is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated and cannot be changed Clicking on this field opens the expression editor for assembling an expression For Cover elements an expression is however used rarely When this box is checked the cover gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog become inactive Access to these properties is resumed only after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the Cover Y coordinate of the upper left co
52. The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For infopoints the zones Font settings and Supplemental font support in the General settings tab as well as the Infopoint and hyperlinks tab of the stylesheet editor are important Helpful Hint As infopoint fields are often created with white text on dark background the readability of the text Value property can be improved by 4 231 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Chapter 4 Forms Development using a stylesheet with a bold font such as Default 10 Bold instead of Default 10 Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence This property is always deactivated and cannot be changed When the box is checked the infopoint is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated and cannot be changed In this property of the infopoint field the text is entered which appears in the infopoint field and which indicates that this field is an infopoint Typical values are or ori Clicking this property opens the expression editor for text entry The text of an infopoint field must be simple text HTML code is not interpreted a
53. The core of the masked input field is the mask The mask controls the structure of the value to be entered or displayed The mask is a string which consists of specific mask characters plus other constant characters The following mask characters are available Number U Upper case letter lower case letters are automatically converted to upper case L Lower case letter upper case letters are automatically converted to lower case A Letter or number Letter without consideration of the case Any character H Hexadecimal character 0 9 a f or A F Apostroph escape character is used to protect a control character if it is constant part of the mask as a literal Examples of masked input fields can be found in the sample document masks qdf When a mask character is to appear literally as itself in a mask it is protected with an apostrophe the apostrophe is the Escape character When filling out a mask input field the mask itself is displayed Constant characters are displayed as such and for the characters to be entered a placeholder is used The character used as a placeholder is specified in this property Normally it is the Underscore _ but any character such as Period Space Bullet etc can be used as a placeholder The mask O looks in Preview mode as shown in Fig 4 74 For a better visualization the Period character was used as a placeholder Snapform Designer 5 x User
54. The preferred format depends on the legal organizational premises and on the architecture of the back end systems The selection of the format is made with a set of radio buttons The form is saved in the compact QDF S format and submitted as a whole In order to enable this submission method the form options Allow eFiling and Allow saving to QDF S format must be selected This eFiling method requires special server tools to retrieve the data The form is saved in the open QDF A format and submitted as a whole In order to enable this submission method the form options Allow eFiling and Allow saving to QDF A format must be selected This eFiling method does not require special server tools to retrieve the data The form data is submitted in the binary QDD format and submitted without the base document In order to enable this submission method the form options Allow eFiling and Allow binary export must be selected This eFiling method requires special tools to retrieve the data on the server The form data is submitted in the XML format and submitted without the base document In order to enable this submission method the form options Allow eFiling and Allow XML export must be selected This eFiling method does not require special tools to retrieve the data on the server The form data is submitted as HTML using the POST Method without the base document In order to enable this submission method the form options Allow eFiling must
55. This property defines how the text is horizontally aligned in the hyperlink When the property field is clicked a drop down menu appears with the options left center right which places the text left aligned centered or right aligned within the hyperlink field Default is left The text in the hyperlink field can be rotated by multiples of 90 Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu with the selection of the rotation angles 0 90 180 270 The default value is 0 The background of the hyperlink is set to transparent no covering background color with this check box This property is active by default Hyperlinks in the web environment are usually underlined Checking this box underlines the text of the hyperlink field This property is active by default This is the address URL to which the hyperlink leads Snapform supports all the URI protocol which are registered in the host computer The following protocols are typically supported e http https web pages e mailto E mail 4 226 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Link to object Fig 4 153 Target object selection in Link to object Chapter 4 Forms Development e file open file Note t is in the sole responsibility of the creator of the form to make sure that the target address is correct and without risks for the user Ringler Informatik AG cannot be made liable for any damage caused by the use of hyperlinks This property is a
56. a Description Returns the string representation of the value of argument The Formula entry field is the actual workspace where an expression is entered An expression begins with an equal sign When the equal sign is missing the entry is treated as literal text and it will be shown as such The expression can either be entered directly or it can be assembled from building blocks from the Variables Operators and Functions fields Double clicking on the building blocks transfers it to the Formula field The building blocks contain placeholders for arguments These placeholders can be selected by double clicking Double clicking on a building block to be entered replaces the placeholder with the selected entry The Description field displays a short descriptive text similar to the descriptions in section 5 3 of this manual Using this procedure rather complex expressions can be assembled with a minimum of typing When using functions including optional Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 3 2 9 3 2 9 1 3 2 9 2 Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer arguments care must be given to remove the brackets marking these arguments When the expression is assembled it can be passed to the form by clicking OK It is however recommended to verify the expression for formal correctness by clicking on Check syntax When the syntax checker finds an error a message is displayed which dis
57. a list of comma separated categories Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 70 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference true false status value true or false The field property for the fields of the according category is set Sets the read only property of the fields belonging to the categories specified in category_list to true or false This corresponds to the simultaneous checking or unchecking of the read only checkbox in the Properties dialog of all those fields This function acts inverse to the checking and unchecking of the read only checkbox setPrintable category_list true false setVisible category_list true false see func_status qdf Sin x Math function Calculates the Sine of an angle defined in degrees x numeric any value the entered values repeat in cycles of 360 numeric is between 1 and 1 Returns the Sine of the entered value The entered value is assumed to be in degrees The full circle corresponds to 360 Asin x Acos x Atan x Cos x Tan x other Math functions see func_math2 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 71 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 72 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference
58. addHour time_value number calcMinutes date_first date_second getMinute time_value getMinute time_value Now other date and time functions see func_time qdf addMonth date_value number Date function Calculates the date which is from the date date_value away by number months date_value valid date number integer Date Returns the date which is by number of months apart from the specified date date_value The date argument can be in the future or the past A Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 7 Category Short description Arguments Result Chapter 5 Expression language reference positive number for number means that the returned date is in the future from the entered data and a negative number means that it is in the relative past For calculations from the current date it is possible to use as the value for date_value the function Today If the value for number has numbers after the decimal sign they will be ignored In order to display the result an accordingly formatted date field is necessary In this functions only months are added up The value for the days remains unchanged If necessary the value for the days can be changed using the function addDay date_value number addDay date_value number addYear date_value number Date year month day getMonth date_value Today other date functions see func_date qdf addYear date_value num
59. appears see Fig 4 127 4 184 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 127 QRCode barcode tool cursor Fig 4 128 Newly created QRCode barcode field Chapter 4 Forms Development Assigned to the QRCode barcode tool is a 2D barcode field for QRCode code 96 pt wide and 96 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Becq and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first QRC barcode field placed in a form has therefore the name Bceq000 In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 128 the first QRCode barcode field of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer New form Fie Edt Format Controls View Tools Help aoga J feo Oo 1 19 YRBARamwe B t kK SO Draft Preview Property Value Name Bcq000 Category Styleshest Default 10 Taborder Printable 838s 88 E SA T OR Dr DW Di Der Dr El rl Weer eri Ward rend En 58 1461 46 3483 96 00 96 00 Back color Barcode color Stretch content Autoconfigurate FNC 1 Module size Enable structured append Structured append identifier Structured append index Structured append total ra B E a E a a E a Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace S Fon 420 440 4 a 480 4
60. area is relevant for either other option Importing existing background pages The fastest way to a new form is when there is already an existing background image as a hdt file When the option Form with background layer is selected an entry line for the path to the hdt file becomes active The button opens a normal File Open dialog which allows selection of the file see Fig 4 13 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 13 4 3 3 2 New form with background layer Chapter 4 Forms Development Create new form Form with background layer File C snapform_maual_examples f1 120 hdt Form without background layer Page size Orientation Actual size Number of pages Color Common properties File Format Secure QDF S compact binary format Open QDF A open XML format Stylesheet library Lid The resulting page size depends on the dimensions of the background image The number of pages also depends on the number of pages in the background image document After selecting the hdt file several properties must be specified to create the form see section 4 3 3 3 Note n a form created in this way the background image cannot be edited in the Snapform Designer When the background image must be edited it has to happen in the original document from which the PDF has been generated and the background image has to be created again Creating empty pages If there is no
61. as specified in its tags The width of the displayed text area depends either on the information from the HTML code or if no such information is available on the length of the longest resulting text In order to keep the width of the text area within reasonable limits it is recommended to limit the width by putting the text into a table cell and specifying the width of the table It is also possible to force line breaks using the lt BR gt Tag The size of the displayed info text is independent of the zoom factor of the viewer That means that it is larger relative to the visible form with 4 234 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Text position Chapter 4 Forms Development low zoom factors and gets smaller with high zoom factors This feature must be taken into consideration when designing the text The supported HTML code corresponds to HTML 3 2 with a few additions from HTML 4 0 1 An overview over the supported tags can be found in section 4 3 6 2 Note t is possible to insert referenced images into the info text However in order to display these images an internet connection must be active when the form is used Note When HTML code is entered make sure that after the lt HTML gt lag no further characters are present not even invisible characters such as Space or New line If this is the case the HTML code will be displayed literally Note t is possible that when confirming the info text a warning appears
62. associated to index index ComboBox Name of a selection list field index Index of the selection from the List field to become active integer between 1 and the number of selectable items of the List field The item with Index index gets selected Sets the current selection of the List field ComboBox to the item associated to index index getSelectedindex ComboBox setList ComboBox str_items str_values see func_combobox qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 68 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 69 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference setVisible category_list true false Status function Sets the visible property of the affected category s category_list String with a list of comma separated categories true false status value true or false The field property for the fields of the according category is set Sets the visible property of the fields belonging to the categories specified in category_list to true or false This corresponds to a simultaneous checking or unchecking of the visible checkbox in the Properties dialog of all those fields setPrintable category_list true false setWritable category_list true false see func_status qdf setWritable category_list true false Status function Controls the read only property of the according category s category_list String with
63. box and radio button examples of checkbuttons gdf in the Snapform Viewer aida Dele aus KR WN gt Chapter 4 Forms Development checkbuttons qdf Snapform Viewer 6 Check boxes and Radio buttons 1 2 3 4 X Check me x x x 5 6 7 x lt 1 1 gt Cb000 Simple check box in original size Cb001 Big check box Cb002 Check box linked to the label Lb000 Cb003 Check box with two depending check boxes Cb004 and Cb005 the latter ones are read only RadioQ00 Radio button container with four assigned check boxes Cb006 Cb007 Cb008 and Cb009 Radio001 Radio button container with two check boxes Cb010 and Cb011 the size of the container has been changed so that the check boxes are now outside of its perimeter Radio002 Radio button container with three check boxes Cb012 Cb013 and Cb014 and three dependent check boxes Cb015 Cb016 and Cb017 the latter are read only and represent the state of the radio buttons 4 116 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 4 Fig 4 94 Combo box field cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Selection lists A very common form element is a list of options from which the user can chose This element has no direct equivalent in paper forms but is extensively used in electronic forms and in this case preferable to a big collection of radio buttons Selection lists have two pieces of information the list value face value an
64. can be properly printed This box must be unchecked when the form is printed of preprinted stock 4 267 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 2 4 Secure Open 4 8 3 Chapter 4 Forms Development File format The file format can be selected when a new document is created It is however not known at that moment whether the data will be saved encrypted or in the clear This is why the file format can be specified in the Form settings These radio buttons specify whether the data will be encrypted and compressed or left in the clear in XML form when the form is saved The Secure option saves the form in the QDF S format which is very compact In order to retrieve the data a special server component is required further information about such a component is available from Ringler Informatik AG The Open option saves the form in the QDF A format which is less compact but makes the data accessible to any XML parser or other application The Save with data structure check box specifies whether the complete empty data structure is created when the form is saved in the Snapform Designer This is necessary when the form is used as a template and pre filled on a server This option also makes work easier when developing the connection to a back end process Note This option is limited to the Snapform Designer When saving the form in the Snapform Viewer only the fields with an actual value are passed to the data structu
65. discussion of the relevant points for the choice is beyond the scope of this manual We refer to the appropriate literature and barcode system vendor support 2D barcodes in general When using 2D barcodes in Snapform the following comments may be helpful In 2D barcodes the symbol consists of small elements called modules Modules are normally squares length ratio 1 1 Some symbologies allow other length ratios as well which can be set Because of the larger amount of data and the different reading mechanisms simple check digits are not sufficient for ensuring the data integrity Instead of that error correction mechanisms are built in which allow you to retrieve the data even after reading errors occurred or the symbol has been damaged A higher level of security a higher level of error correction reduces the amount of data because the information for the error correction is contained in additional data With an accordingly high level of error correction built in up to half of the symbol can be damaged and the data can still be retrieved 4 151 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 6 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development The smallest information unit is the so called code word A code word frequently corresponds to an 8 bit byte The data encoding occurs in Snapform by the application and does therefore not needed to be taken into further account However it is important for estimating the available amount of data and t
66. field where the decimal sign and the minus sign are not displayed The window is shown in Fig 4 64 With this setting the field behaves like a normal comb field where the decimal sign is not displayed The minus sign is however displayed The window is shown in Fig 4 64 The distance between the boxes for the individual characters measured in Points The default value is 1 5 pt This value applies to all boxing types The width of the box for the individual characters in Points The default value is 11 3 pt This value applies to the boxing types Each digit and Digits and sign For the boxing type Only 2 the width of the box before the decimal sign default value 74 55 pt and the width of the box after the decimal sign default value 24 85 pt are defined Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 2 5 Fig 4 67 Date field cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Note As the default value for the width of boxes is not connected to the font size defined in the stylesheet it is important to make sure that the width of the boxes is sufficient when larger font sizes are used As a rule of thumb use the value of the font size of the field for just numbers and 1 2 times the value of the font size of the field for general text For the boxing types Each digit and Digits and sign the width of the entry field is recalculated according to the number of characters specified in the Length property and the field is scaled accordingly If there i
67. font size of the field for just numbers and 1 2 times the value of the font size of the field for general text When the field boxing is activated the width of the entry field is recalculated based on the number of characters specified in the Length property and the field is scaled accordingly If no length has been specified or its value is 0 the field gets automatically scaled to a width for 10 characters This value will also be entered into the Length property When this box is checked only numbers between 0 and 9 can be entered All other entries are ignored The difference between this and a numeric field is that preceding zeros are not suppressed This property is often used for serial numbers or similar information Multiline fields To display or enter text when the single line text field tool is not sufficient In this case the multiline text tool can be used which allows a unlimited number of lines The Multiline text field tool creates a field which allows displaying and entering multiple lines of text After selecting the tool a cursor with a Multiline text field element in default size appears see Fig 4 57 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 57 Multiline text field cursor Fig 4 58 Newly created multiline text field Chapter 4 Forms Development eas Assigned to the Multiline text field tool is a multiline text field 96 pt wide and 12 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It
68. func_date qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 31 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 32 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference getHour time_value Date function Shows the hour number of the time time_value time_value valid time Whole number between 0 and 24 Returns the hour number of the entered time time_value This function is part of the inverse function of Time hour minute second getMinute time_value Time hour minute second other date functions see func_time qdf getMinute time_value Date function Shows the minute number of the time time_value time_value valid time Whole number between 0 and 59 Returns the minute number of the entered time time_value This function is part of the inverse function of Time hour minute second Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 33 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 34 Category Short description Chapter 5 Expression language reference getHour time_value Time hour minute second other date functions see func_time qdf getMod10 value Consistency check function Returns a checksum created with the MOD 10 algorithm over the entered value value value number or string containing numeric or
69. ignored With the retail business codes EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E for printed products books periodicals it is possible to add 2 or 5 digit supplemental codes These supplemental codes are lower than the main symbol and the clear text line is above their symbol This property specifies the relative height of the supplemental code A typical value is 0 8 This property is only active when the code type EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A or UPC E has been selected With the other code types it is ignored With the retail business codes EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E for printed products books periodicals it is possible to add 2 or 5 digit supplemental codes These supplemental codes are lower than the main symbol and the clear text line is above their symbol This property specifies the distance of the supplemental code symbol form the main symbol measured in centimeters This property is only active when the code type EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A or UPC E has been selected With the other code types it is ignored 4 137 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Supplement 2 digit supplement and 5 digit supplement UPCE encoding system 4 4 5 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development With the retail business codes EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E for printed products books periodicals it is possible to add 2 or 5 digit supplemental codes These supplemental codes are lower than the main symbol and the clear text line is above their symbol
70. in the PDF document or whether the result of the conversion is acceptable When running a batch conversion it is possible that the converter gets stuck with a certain file and clicking the Stop button does not stop the conversion In this case close the window with the close box this will reliably stop the conversion process The file causing the problem must now be checked and prepared again for the conversion or be removed from the source directory Creating a new document The conversion of a PDF document into a Background image is essentially a preliminary step to create a new QDF document but it can be done independent of further actions The actual work with the Snapform Designer begins with the creation of a new document New documents can be created either as empty pages or by importing existing documents The menu item File gt New Form opens the Create new form dialog see Fig 4 12 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 12 The Create new 4 3 3 1 form dialog Chapter 4 Forms Development Create new form Form without background layer Page size Orientation Actual size Number of pages Color Common properties File format Secure QDF S compact binary format Open QDF A open XML format Stylesheet library i i l a The Create new form dialog consists of three areas Form with background layer Form without background layer and Common properties The last
71. in the element stack the Rectangle element is on top of both Cover elements Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 5 4 Chapter 4 Forms Development Images and logos An important element of the base layout of forms are images and logos Snapform allows inserting of raster graphics as images into an Image element where they can be either bound statically into the document or dynamically loaded normally when the document is opened The advantage of a statically inserted image is that it is always available independent on whether the Snapform Viewer can use a network connection or whether the image is available locally Snapform can read most of the raster graphic formats used in an office or web environment If a certain format is not supported there are a large number of appropriate converters available When everything fails it is always possible to create a PDF and then extract the image using Acrobat Professional It must be considered with raster images that there is a direct connection between the size of the image in pixels the resolution of the image in pixel per length unit dpi dots per inch and the absolute dimensions of the image on the form in inch or millimeters These relationships cannot be changed A raster image always has a given size in pixels This size is the result of the creation of the image When the image is inserted into an Image element in Snapform it gets a specific absolute dimension T
72. is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters MI and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first multiline text field placed in a form has therefore the name m1000 In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 58 the first multiline text field of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help belo Im YRBORaae T t k FO x Properties of Multiline text field Hoga J Property Value a ig g f Name miooo O 20 4 60 80 100 120 140 180 180 200 220 240 280 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 rae Tak ET Karl ar a EPS Ea et Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable 48 0978 31 7935 96 00 46 2857 Tooltip text Number of lines Center single line Link to object Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form a a E a i E8 0 a G JE a a 3a Mi 20 BEEE lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the multiline text field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point
73. is also invisible in the Preview mode and the Snapform Viewer 4 108 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development The Radio button group tool creates a radio button container After selecting the tool a cursor with a radio button container in default size appears see Fig 4 87 Fig 4 87 Radio button Assigned to the Radio button group tool is a radio button container 96 pt wide and 24 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Radio and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first radio button container placed in a form has therefore the name Radioooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 88 the first radio button container of the form has been placed and then selected Fig 4 88 Newly created Snapform Designer New form f adio button File Edt Format Controls View Tools Help har OO ehje Baraa container x Property Value Name Radio000 Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable 46 3483 30 3371 96 00 Height 24 00 Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form 7 re 5 i a E w al B GB z Ged 22 g lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the radio button container can be changed by dragging the anchor poi
74. is clear that for a successful eFiling the form and an according back end process must be matching This also means the form developer must cooperate with the respective IT departments The eFiling dialog see Fig 4 179 contains the information relevant for the data transfer and the eFiling amp Form settings Forms Development Allow eFiling Format A a D m Fi g z Data only in binary format QDD Data only in XML format Data only as HTML Form lt lt ps a Ea 5 5 File name Name zn d z R F g a amp Target Recepient name a Serverside Complete form in QDF S compact binary Format Complete form in QDF A open XML Format Interaction Target URL a Description UI Settings Button name Tooltip The eFiling dialog is subdivided into the areas Format File name Target and UI settings This check box is the main switch for the eFiling capability When it is checked the mechanism is active otherwise all further settings of this dialog are ignored 4 280 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 8 1 Complete form in QDF S compact binary format Complete form in QDF A open XML format Data only in binary format QDD Data only in XML format Data only as HTML form Chapter 4 Forms Development Format The eFiling allows using several data formats
75. is for information purposes only It may be changed but the change is discarded immediately This property specifies how many logical rows of the table are displayed at a time Default value is 3 The actual displayed number of rows depends on the value of the Row height property and the dimensions of the table container When the table container is not big enough only as many rows are displayed as will fit within the perimeter of the table container Rows may be displayed cropped A special case is when this value is set to 1 This leads to a so called ohantom table As only one row is available entries may not be made correctly and also the display of the information is limited In order to display data an auxiliary table named report is used which gives access to all data in the table This table is defined in the Configure table property Snapform allows you to build up tables with no pre determined number of logical rows This property controls whether rows may be added beyond the number specified in the of visible rows property When the actual number of logical rows goes beyond the number of visible rows a scrollbar appears which allows scrolling up and down the displayed rows When this box is checked an unlimited number of rows can be added to the table Otherwise the number of rows of the table is limited When more rows are available than can be displayed the Snapform Viewer creates additional pages when p
76. it gets opened and it cannot be saved under the same name This is very useful in places where a centralized form repository is in use When this box is checked the form is saved as a Template in the qdft format The name under which the filled out form is saved from Snapform Viewer can be suggested via this field Such a suggestion is particularly important if the form is part of a document based workflow and the file name has a meaning The suggestion may either be static a fixed text or dynamic as the result of an expression The structure of the suggested name depends on the actual use of the form Clicking on the icon opens the expression editor Here the expression to calculate the suggested file name can be entered Part of that suggestion could be for example the current date first name and last name or any other unique identification The expression editor has access to all available fields and functions Printing This check box controls whether the form is scaled when it is printed that it fits completely within the printable area of the selected printer This ensures the form will be completely printed If scanners with optical character recognition are used in the post processing of the printed forms it must be verified whether scaling is acceptable If there are doubts it is recommended to uncheck the Fit page to printer margins check box and instead provide sufficiently wide margins in the form so it
77. length of string count optional Number of characters of the substring integer between 1 and the length of string String Creates a substring of string with the length count beginning from position start The position numbering begins with 0 With 0 as starting value the function is equivalent to the Left string count function When no value is specified for count the substring is created until the end of string which is then equivalent to the Right string count function Right string count Left string count Str x see func_string 1 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 76 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 77 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference Tan x Math function Calculates the Tangent of an angle defined in degrees x numeric any value the entered values repeat in cycles of 180 numeric Returns the Tangent of the entered value The entered value is assumed to be in degrees The full circle corresponds to 360 Atan x Asin x Acos x Cos x Sin x other Math functions see func_math2 qdf TblValues table tbl_start tbl_end row_ start row_end delimiter column column Table function Creates a string with table values assembled row by row and specific delimiters table Table name tbl_start String marking the beginning of the table Snapf
78. make much sense because it will not be displayed Instead the expression which controls the actions happening when a selection is made is entered here The expression is evaluated when the selected element of the list is changed as well as when the document opens and other expression evaluation processes are run When this box is checked the Combo box field gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box 4 120 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Left Top Width Height Read only Single use field Tooltip text Chapter 4 Forms Development X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the combo box Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the combo box Width of the bounding box of the combo box Height of the bounding box of the combo box When this box is checked the combo box is marked as read only and its content cannot be manually changed The value may still be changed as the result of an expression A read only combo box is still part of the tab order and its assigned expressions are evaluated according to its selected va
79. menu containing the list of the stylesheets available for the form The text for the column headers is specified in the Header column of the configuration table This property specifies after which page of the form the report table is inserted when the form is printed Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu which contains the list of the page numbers of the form When no page is selected the report table is inserted after the last page of the form Assembling tables After the table container has been placed the table has to be assembled This is done by creating a master row within the table container and by placing the according form elements After the master row is assembled it may be necessary to adjust the table properties see section 4 4 7 1 Form elements which are placed within the table container are assigned to it and become part of the table row When a form element becomes assigned to a table container it changes its color see Fig 4 137 oo Draft Preview 0 20 4 100 120 140 160 1 4 207 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 138 Fig 4 139 Forbidden cursor with form elements which cannot be placed ina table container Table container with placed form elements Chapter 4 Forms Development The color change is a visual indication that the form element has become part of the table Most form elements may become part of a table row The following elements cannot be pla
80. multiples of 90 Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu with the selection of the rotation angles 0 90 180 270 The default value is 0 This property specifies the method which is used to encode the data stream for the symbol When selecting this property a drop down menu opens with the options AUTO ASCII C40 TEXT and BASE256 AUTO the default The settings have the following meaning 4 179 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual AUTO ASCII C40 TEXT BASE256 Format Chapter 4 Forms Development The best possible encoding is selected automatically by the software This encoding is used when the data stream consists mainly of characters with ASCII values between O and 127 It encodes one alphanumeric or two numeric characters into one Byte This encoding is used when the data stream consists mainly of numbers and uppercase letters It encodes three alphanumeric characters into two Bytes This encoding is used when the data stream consists mainly of numbers and lowercase letters It encodes three alphanumeric characters into two Bytes This encoding is used when the data stream consists of 8 bit binary data Normally the setting AUTO creates sufficiently well encoded symbols The Datamatrix barcode has a discrete series of dimensions measured in the number of modules per side These dimensions are defined by the internal structure of the symbol The following dimensions are defined and allow
81. of the Snapform PDF Converter Use Unicode mapping Chapter 4 Forms Development Preferences The conversion of a PDF document to a Snapform background image runs normally without problems particularly when the PDF document has been prepared as described There are however certain cases where the automatic conversion logic hits limitations or the conversion itself takes an excessive amount of time In such cases certain parameters can be adjusted in the Menu File gt Preferences see Fig 4 9 Preferences W Use Unicode mapping lf Skiptexts with big fort Maximum font size 200 W Skip complex graphic objects Maximum subelements count 720 Object as bounds Iw Cancel Normally a font is embedded and used in a PDF document with a defined character mapping table There are cases when this table is missing or faulty or when the version of the font installed on the local computer does not exactly match the font defined in the PDF document Selecting this option forces the use of the character set encoding according to Unicode Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Skip texts with big font Skip complex graphic objects 4 3 2 4 4 3 2 5 Chapter 4 Forms Development It is possible that the font size is very big such as in a watermark where it may be preferable to not convert such text This parameter suppresses the conversion of text with a font size greater than specified in the Maximum font size val
82. on the according radio button the page orientation whether the page should be printed in portrait or landscape format The row height in the report depends on the value of the Row height in the table which will be scaled proportionally to the table width This ensures that the report can display at least the same amount of information as the table in the form With this the table is specified and the form can be used Examples of tables The following examples show the different variations of tables in Snapform The document tables gdf see Fig 4 145 Draft mode and Fig 4 146 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows various examples of tables After selecting the Field elements in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties 4 218 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 145 Table examples from tables qdf in Draft mode Draft Preview Fig 4 146 Examples from 00o tabellen qdf Snapform Viewer tables qdfin the CE Mr fiso Snapform Viewer not filled out S Tables various examples 1 Storage Unit In Out 5 P i P 7 Flights 1 Flights 2 Flights 3 1 L Units Fit i 2 Units ee 3 Units Ly ZRH 2 Name First name Date of birth Membership T J _ Yes No FRA 2 I J Yes No 3 I Yes No MUC S 3 Acc
83. opens the expression editor In most of the cases the value is the result of a calculation When this box is checked the Aztec barcode field gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the Aztec barcode 4 156 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Top Width Height Title Transparent Back color Barcode color Chapter 4 Forms Development Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the Aztec barcode field Width of the bounding box of the Aztec barcode field Height of the bounding box of the Aztec barcode field This is a line of text which is placed above the Aztec barcode field This title may for example contain information for the operator who manually scans in the code The title may be either simple text or entered in HTML form It is of fixed font size 10 pt and its length is limited to the width of the Aztec barcode field The background of the Aztec barcode is set to transparent no covering background color with this check box This property is unchecked by default
84. other symbologies which require square modules this value may differ from the unit height value It is recommended to select multiples or multiples of one half of the unit height The default value is 0 015 cm It is highly recommended to not go below 0 075 cm Note When the Stretch content property has been selected the Unit width value is overridden This property controls the height of a module of the PDF 417 barcode It is entered in cm As the PDF 417 barcode allows rectangular modules as opposed to other symbologies which require square modules this value may differ from the unit width value It is recommended to select multiples or multiples of one half of the unit width The default value is 0 015 cm It is highly recommended to not go below 0 075 cm Note When the Stretch content property has been selected the Unit height value is overridden This property controls how wide the PDF 417 barcode symbol will be This value sets the number of columns for the payload data In the actual symbol 4 additional columns are added 4 169 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Rows Rotation angle Error correction level Compaction Chapter 4 Forms Development The smallest value for this property is 3 and the value should not be higher than 18 to make sure that the symbol can be properly read This property specifies the minimum number of rows the symbol must have If the amount of data is smaller than necessary fo
85. pi e null Operators x y x y x y x y xy x Y x y xl y x gt y x gt y x lt y x lt y x AND y xORy NOT x Functions Abs x Acos x Table of contents 274 275 275 276 276 277 279 280 281 282 282 282 283 284 OMOWAONNNDAAUUUU A HPWWWW 3 00 SnapForm Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 5 5 3 6 5 3 7 5 3 8 5 3 9 5 3 10 5 3 11 5 3 12 5 3 13 5 3 14 5 3 15 5 3 16 5 3 17 5 3 18 5 3 19 5 3 20 5 3 21 5 3 22 5 3 23 5 3 24 5 3 25 5 3 26 5 3 27 5 3 28 5 3 29 5 3 30 5 3 31 5 3 32 5 3 33 5 3 34 5 3 35 5 3 36 5 3 37 5 3 38 5 3 39 5 3 40 5 3 41 5 3 42 addDay date_value number addHour time_value number addMinute time_value number addMonth date_value number addYear date_value number Asin x Atan x calcDays date_first date second calcHours date_first date second calcMinutes date first date second Ceil x Cell table column row checkCardNumber value checkMod10 value checkMod10r value Compress x Cos x Cover x createGUID Date year month day Exp x find string regex start Floor x getBytes string getCol getContent url getDatalD getDay date_value getHour time_value getMinute time_value getMod10 value getMod10r value getMonth date_value getPrintID getPrintldStr length digits getRandomString length digits getRow getSelectedindex ComboBox getSessionID getValues d
86. screenshots will only be shown when necessary Remarks Remarks are labelled depending on their importance as Attention Note and Helpful Hint Attention A remark labelled Attention contains information which is important and must be considered as it might otherwise lead to serious malfunction or data loss Note A remark labelled Note contains explanatory information or additions to the text It is highly recommended to follow these notes Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 1 2 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Helpful Hint A remark labelled Helpful Hint contains information which makes working with the program easier and is based on practical experience Covered Software Versions This manual covers the behavior of the Snapform Designer version 5 1 9 and may refer to the Snapform Viewer version 1 5 24 It can be used for older versions but certain features may not be present Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Snapform Components Snapform PDF Converter The format converter converts PDF documents into the Snapform file format This prevents the need for recreating the layout when working with legacy forms The forms developer can then concentrate on the implementation of the form s functionality and logic and save a considerable amount of time This application is available for Windows only As an alternative to using the Sna
87. see Fig 3 26 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 3 User Manual Using the Snapform Designer Fig 3 26 The Find Replace window Controls Tools Find amp replace Find what J C Match case C Match whole word J Search all text Search result Total instances found 0 Replace with Number of replacements 0 The entry field Find what holds a string of data Clicking on the Find next button starts the search Normally strings are searched in the Name Value and Tooltip Text properties When the Search all Text box is checked all fields and their values are searched By checking the Match case and Match whole word check boxes the search is more precise In the first case upper and lower case letters are taken into consideration and in the second case the search string must be surrounded by word boundaries to create a match When the original search string is not conclusive these options can be very helpful The matches are displayed line by line in the Search result field see Fig 3 27 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 3 27 Search results in the Find Replace window 3 2 8 Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Snapform Designer func_math2 qdf Form File Edit Format Controls view Tools Help ooga a foo OO 1 1 gt BM Rw e R e a Property Form name Print back color o Allow duplicate names 24 Validatio
88. see Fig 4 110 Draft mode and Fig 4 111 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows various properties of 1D barcodes The examples use Code 39 whose value is always the same After selecting the Field elements in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the expression if there is any Draft Preview 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 480 480 500 520 540 4 Sh 1D Barcodes general properties 4 149 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 111 Examples from I dbarcodes_gener al qdf in the Snapform Viewer BASA mn 180 n CON AM Chapter 4 Forms Development 1dbarcodes_general qdf Snapform Viewer L L piping mep BANAN 234567 1234567 ENAA O O E 1234567 12345678 67 234567 12345678 1234567 s z N wo A a O N 8 1234567 3 4 12345678S 12345 123456 5 SL9SPETL 1234567S 1 1 Bc000 Code 39 text 1234567 with check digit Unit width 0 04 cm Height 1 cm Wide unit width 3 narrow unit widths Intercharacter separator 2 narrow unit widths Bc002 Code 39 text 1234567 with check digit Unit width 0 03 cm Height 0 45 cm Wide unit width 2 narrow unit wi
89. start count String function Creates a sub sequence of the byte sequence byte_array beginning with byte number start and the number of count bytes byte_array byte sequence normally created with Compress x or getBytes string start integer between 0 and the length of the byte sequence byte_array count optional Integer between 1 and the length of the byte sequence byte_array when the value is not present the extraction occurs to the end of the byte sequence Byte sequence This function is the equivalent of the SubStr string start count function for strings but for byte sequences The function creates a sub byte sequence of the byte_array byte sequence beginning with the character at position start and with the length count When count is not defined the extraction occurs until the end of the byte sequence The starting position of the byte sequence begins with 0 getBytes string Compress x see func_string2 qdf and func_barcode qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 75 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference SubStr string start count String function Creates a substring beginning at character position start and with length count string String entered directly or as a result of an expression start Character position from which on the substring is created integer between 0 and the
90. still assures reliable decoding of the data 4 152 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 112 Aztec barcode tool cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Characters are encoded according to ASCII for values 0 to 127 and according to ISO 8859 1 Latin Alphabet 1 values 128 to 255 This allows encoding text in most western world languages The Aztec barcode tool creates a field which allows displaying an Aztec 2D barcode After selecting the tool a cursor with a 2D barcode field in default size appears see Fig 4 112 Assigned to the Aztec barcode tool is a 2D barcode field for Aztec code 96 pt wide and 96 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Bea and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first Aztec barcode field placed in a form has therefore the name Beaooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 113 the first Aztec barcode field of the form has been placed and then selected 4 153 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 113 Newly created Aztec barcode field Snapform Designer New form Fie Edit Format Controls View Tools Help BeA KEIN B m Hi a i E A g i a a fea 20 a 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG s O 0 111 YRBARwmale S e x Properties of Aztec barcode P
91. string Example see func_regex qdf Determines whether the pattern defined in regex is contained in the entered value string Example see func_regex qdf Replaces all matches of the pattern defined in regex in the entered value orig_string with the string replace_with Example see func_regex qgdf Math functions Math functions are applied to numbers and run mathematical operations The following functions are part of the group of math functions Calculates the absolute value of the argument Example see func_math1 qdf Determines the greater of the two values Example see func_math1 qdf Determines the smaller of the two values Example see func_math1 qdf Calculates the Sine of an angle defined in degrees Example see func_math2 qdf 4 247 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Cos x Tan x Asin x Acos x Atan x Round x Ceil x Floor x Trunc x Chapter 4 Forms Development Calculates the Cosine of an angle defined in degrees Example see func_math2 qdf Calculates the Tangent of an angle defined in degrees Example see func_math2 qdf Returns the Arcsine of the argument in degrees Example see func_math2 qdf Returns the Arccosine of the argument in degrees Example see func_math2 qdf Returns the Arctangent of the argument in degrees Example see func_math2 qdf Rounds the entered value up or down to the next whole number Example see func_math1 qdf Rounds the ente
92. string Returns the length number of characters of the string x Str x InStr string pattern start_position Left string count Right string count and other string functions see func_string 1 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 52 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 53 Category Chapter 5 Expression language reference Log x Math function Calculates the Natural Logarithm of x In x x numeric positive number numeric Calculates the Natural Logarithm base e of x and returns it x must be greater than 0 If x is equal to O the result is co When x is smaller than 0 the logarithm is not defined and the error symbol gets displayed Frequently the logarithm to base 10 is used It is calculated as follows Log x Log 10 and similarly the logarithm to base 2 Log x Log 2 The inverse function is Exp x Exp x see func_math2 qdf match string regex Regular Expression function Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 54 Category Short description Arguments Result Chapter 5 Expression language reference Determines whether the pattern defined in regex is contained in the entered value string string String regex Regular Expression boolean TRUE or FALSE Determines whether the entry value string conta
93. the available data capacity can be used but a symbol where half of the area is covered or otherwise changed can still be read 4 163 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 117 PDF 417 barcode tool cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Another feature of the PDF 417 barcode is the possibility to chain a great number of symbols to represent a large amount of data This feature is called Macro PDF 41 7 The PDF 417 barcode tool Ml creates a field which allows displaying a PDF 417 2D barcode After selecting the tool a cursor with a 2D barcode field in default size appears see Fig 4 117 ti Assigned to the PDF 417 barcode tool is a 2D barcode field for PDF 417 code 192 pt wide and 48 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Bep and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first PDF 417 barcode field placed in a form has therefore the name Bepooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 118 the first PDF 417 barcode field of the form has been placed and then selected 4 164 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 118 Newly created PDF 417 barcode field Snapform Designer New form Fie Edit Format Controls View Tools Help Hosa 3 ee oO 1 1 1 BB eam e R e Chapter 4 Forms Development Draft Preview Property Name Eee ce too smo wo Mo tao amo zzo zan ceo zao o
94. the form and whose fields must therefore be protected In Snapform this protection occurs in Single use fields which can be modified until the form is saved for the first time After that the field is marked as read only When this box is checked the check box can be toggled until the form is saved for the first time After saving for the first time the check box will be marked as read only The Tooltip text is help text that appears when the mouse cursor hovers over the field for a certain time This text is in many cases the first and simplest help to the according field With increased requirements for accessibility the tooltip text becomes more and more important because screen readers use this information It is particularly important for government forms that the form designer inserts well thought out tooltips Double clicking on this property opens the Edit text value window see Fig 4 48 As indicated in the explanatory text it is also possible to enter text in HTML form for which the same rules apply as for labels For further notes about tooltip text see the description in section 4 4 2 1 4 107 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Print border Link to object 4 4 3 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development Note Tooltip text should be short Therefore it is advised to avoid entering excessive HTML formatting and inserting images When this box is checked the border of the check box field is printed otherwise it is n
95. the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence which is logical because the Image is not an active element When the box is checked the image field will be printed When the box is checked the image field is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated and cannot be changed Clicking in the property field opens the expression editor for entering an expression In image fields with referenced contents meaning that the image is not directly inserted into the field the result of the expression is the path to the image file to be inserted The path is an URL Uniform Resource Locator which in the case of images is mainly one of the following protocols http https ftp file In order for the form to use the first three protocols an Internet connection must be available and active The file protocol refers to a local file which means that the path to this file must either be the result of a calculation or constant The simplest example is the definition of a constant value item 2 in the sample document images gdf Fig 4 39 http www google ch images logo sm gif This is a constant value and when the form opens the specified image is loaded from the Internet Rather similar is not shown in the sample document a constant result http www google ch images logo sm gif This loads the specified image when the form opens and each t
96. the user must be notified The text for this notification is application dependent and can therefore not be specified in the application This field allows you to specify the text to be displayed when the form is opened after it has expired Invalid form In order to prevent submitting invalid data which can be an issue with electronic forms and might even lead to a lock down of the back end system the form s data can be validated This validation is done according to a validation rule which is specified in this zone of the dialog 4 275 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Validation rule Warning message 4 8 4 3 Warning message 4 8 5 Chapter 4 Forms Development The validation rule is an expression which must return either TRUE or FALSE When the returned value is TRUE the form is valid otherwise it is not valid Clicking on the Expression icon opens the expression editor to enter the expression All field objects and functions are available in the expression editor When the form is considered to be invalid the user must be notified This is done with the freely specifiable message from this field The text may be displayed in the form of a system message Incomplete form Besides to the validity of a form you can also check the form s completeness by testing the form to see if all fields where the Required field property is checked have an entry This means that there is no need for an explicit validatio
97. to the actually needed height for a row The value of Row height must be greater than the height of the elements of the logical row in order to prevent overlapping elements when the table is displayed This is easily done by selecting all the elements within the table container copying and pasting them again Assemble the still active 4 209 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development selection with Edit gt Group to a group The property window of the group displays information about its dimensions Helpful Hint t is possible to keep open a second Snapform Designer window with an empty form and to paste the copied elements into this window This will keep the actual form free of superfluous elements 2 Adjust the height of the table container Row height and of visible rows The height of the table container must be greater than the number of visible rows times the height of the row so that the last row of the table will not appear cropped On the other hanad it should not be considerably greater as this would lead to excessive whitespace and a scrollbar would be displayed in a confusing way Controlling the selector The selector is a visual element of the table which is displayed only in Preview mode and in the Snapform Viewer It is used to indicate the row number of the table as well as to select the active row The size of the selector corresponds to the height of the table elemen
98. tool is explained in section 4 4 4 The Password field tool is explained in section 4 4 2 7 The Radio buttons group tool is explained in section 4 4 3 2 The Table tool is explained in section 4 4 7 1 The 1D barcodes tool is explained in section 4 4 5 1 The Aztec barcode tool is explained in section 4 4 6 2 The PDF417 barcode tool is explained in section 4 4 6 3 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Datamatrix barcode QRCode barcode 3 2 2 7 Fig 3 18 The View Menu Controls toolbar Fit window Fit width Previous page Next page 3 2 2 8 Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer The Datamatrix barcode tool is explained in section 4 4 6 4 The QRCode barcode tool is explained in section 4 4 6 5 The View Menu The View menu see Fig 3 18 contains functions about displaying the form on the workspace and for page navigation view Tools Help Controls toolbar a Fit window r Fit width This menu item shows or hides the Controls toolbar see section 3 2 3 Scales the view of the active document so it fits completely into the Editor window Scales the view of the active document so it fits the width of the Editor window Switches to the previous page only active when the document consists of multiple pages Switches to the next page only active when the document consists of multiple pages The Tools Menu The Tools menu see Fig 3 19 contains special functions which ar
99. v Snapform qdf Snapform qdf the standard Snapform format Snapform QDF A qdf the standard Snapform file format with disclosed data layer Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Page Setup Print Close Fig 3 10 TheClosedocument dialog 1 to 5 last opened files Quit Windows only 3 2 2 4 Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer e Snapform Template qdft Form template which always opens as an empty form e Snapform QDF A Template qdft Form template with disclosed data layer which always opens as an empty form e Snapform Field layer hdo Format containing only the field layer If no file extension is entered it will be added automatically Opens the normal Page Setup dialog which is provided by the operating system Opens the normal Print dialog provided by the operating system Closes the form If there are unsaved changes a dialog appears asking whether the document should be saved see Fig 3 10 Snapform Designer A Do you want to save changes No Cancel This list contains the 5 most recently opened files Only files which have been opened using the File open dialog are placed into this list Closes the Snapform Designer This command is in this menu under Windows only On Macintosh this command is located in the Snapform Designer menu The Edit Menu The Edit menu contains commands to edit elements copy align etc see Fig 3 11 Snapform Designer
100. with links and image value of Info text details lt HTML gt lt P gt somewhat more complex HTML text lt BR gt Snapform Info are available from lt BR gt via E Mail lt a href mailto info snapform com gt info snapform com lt a gt lt BR gt Web lt a href http www snapform com gt www snapform com lt A gt lt BR gt and here the sch amp ouml ne beautiful Gecko lt BR gt lt img src http www snapform com img s blue jpg alt a non loadable image gt lt P gt lt HTML gt 4 239 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 165 nfopoint examples from infopoint qdf in the Snapform Viewer with opened info texts 4 4 8 3 4 4 8 4 Chapter 4 Forms Development i Snapform Viewer Datei Ansicht Einstellungen Fenster Hilfe 8 ee n infopoint qdf Snapform Viewer Lb fa i 151K ee 1 i simple infotext 4 E Heading levels 5 a Somewhat more complex HTML text Heading H1 SEN arenai are available 2 0 simple multiline text i Web www snapform com ETE Heading H2 E afal Gak Snapform Infos infor snaptorm com http iwww snapform com Heading HS Heading H4 Heading HS Heading 16 R A very simple HTML encoded Help text A whole block multiline with bold italic and of text to even italic underlined font style cent lt 11 00 Buttons Another active element are push buttons These are elements which the user activates for example by clicking which initiates an
101. xs complexType mixed true gt lt xs sequence minOccurs 0 gt lt xs element ref rows gt lt xs sequence gt Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 6 Snapform File Formats lt xs attribute name name type xs string use required gt lt xs attribute name type type xs integer use required gt lists lt xS annotation gt lt xs documentation gt Possible values for attribute type are Integer value Double value String value Boolean value Date value Table Array of bytes String value with index used in dropdown ONAUPRWNE I 9 Label value 10 Negative double value lt xs documentation gt lt xs annotation gt lt xs attribute gt lt xs attribute name calculated type xs boolean use optional default false gt lt xs attribute name visible type xs boolean use optional default true gt lt xs attribute name printable type xs boolean use optional default true gt lt xs attribute name readonly type xs boolean use optional default false gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name row gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element ref value maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name rows gt lt xs complexType gt lt xS Sequence gt lt xs element ref row maxOccurs unbounded g
102. yyyy Dt001 Boxed date field format dd MM yyyy Dt002 Simple date field format dd MM yyyy the entered date must be in the 21st century Mk000 Masked input field Mask Social Security Number US Mk001 Masked input field Mask AAA 25 License plate of the French Departement Dr me Mk002 Masked input field boxed mask O Swiss phone number boxing separates the number blocks placeholder is Pw000 simple password field 4 102 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 3 4 4 3 1 Fig 4 84 Check box cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Check boxes and Radio buttons A frequent element of a form is to indicate whether a certain statement is correct or which option applies for a certain statement In paper forms this question is implemented with a series of boxes to check In electronic forms this is done with check boxes and radio buttons A check box is a form element where a certain statement can be marked as applicable or not applicable Radio buttons are a group of form elements which identify various mutually exclusive options for a certain statement and exactly one option must be applicable As these definitions say check boxes and radio buttons are closely related This is also apparent in the way these two form elements have been implemented in Snapform The base element is the check box which provides the base functionality For radio buttons a Container is
103. 0 pt 40 pt wide black 11 Ln010 horizontal 40 pt long 40 pt wide dash size 1 pt black 12 Ln011 diagonal right bounding box 40 x 40 pt 40 pt wide dash size 1 pt black 13 Ln012 vertical 40 pt long 40 pt wide dash size 0 5 pt grey CON WWM Rectangles The Rectangle tool creates rectangular and oval lines After selecting the tool a cursor with a rectangle in default size appears see Fig 4 26 p Assigned to the Rectangle tool is a black rectangle 60 pt wide and 12 pt high with a line width of 1 pt Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Re and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first rectangle placed in a form has therefore the name Rc000 In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 27 the first rectangle of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 27 Newly created rectangle Snapform Designer New form Fie Edit Format Controls View Tools Help jaj oea 4 Draft Preview Br ni 40 60 80 100 120 140 100 180 200 220 240 200 280 300 320 340 30 1 Jer EI 1 WBHBHBBe Ss HBeBAN afa fo O JEENA E N EE Properties of Rectangle Property Name Category Styleshest Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Color Border width Is oval Da
104. 00 Pick a color Swatches HSB RGB Preview B Sample Text Sample Text E E a Sample Text Sample Text l OK Cancel Reset In the RGB view the colors are set using the three sliders for Red Green and Blue At the same time the text fields at the right of the sliders show the current values It is also possible to enter the RGB values directly into the fields or increase or decrease them with the Up Down arrow symbols The values for R G and B can be between 0 and 255 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Operation modes of The Snapform Designer The Snapform Designer has two distinctive operation modes The Draft view is the actual workspace for forms development The Preview view represents the form as it would appear in the Snapform Viewer Certain components of the form are displayed correctly only in Preview such as HTML formatted text The operation mode is switched by clicking on the according button in the title bar of the editor Draft mode Draft mode is the actual workspace for forms development In Draft view elements can be placed on the workspace and their properties can be changed In Draft mode the tool bars and Controls bar are active Also all the menu items if not limited for other reasons are active Preview mode Preview mode is used for verifying the look of the form as well as testing expressions and the form
105. 03 Unit height cm 0 45 Wide unit width 2 00 Bar height ratio Ratation angle oe Text Stretch content Codabar start char Codabar stop char Code128 char set Check char Guard bars Intercharacter separator 1 00 Controls Tools Find amp replace Form Page 1 u B a al Si a a E an g 22 a al og lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the barcode field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the barcode field are controlled in the properties window see Fig 4 103 Note The barcode field has several properties which are relevant only for specific barcode systems These properties are shown but are only active when the according barcode type has been selected 4 126 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 103 Properties of a barcode field 4 127 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development 4 128 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Property Name Category Sty
106. 045 42 1348 240 00 72 00 Horizontal row direction of columns 0 of visible rows 3 Allow growth Hide selector Row height Selector distance Scrollbar distance Header text Start numbering at Configure table Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form S Page 1 7 a al I a ad E E ga a E E 20 Eee se 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the table container can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The next step to create a table is adding table elements see section 4 47 2 The other features of the table container are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 135 4 198 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 135 Properties of a table container Property Name Category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Properties of Table Value Tableooo Default 10 10 51 4045 42 1348 240 00 2 00 Chapter 4 Forms Development Horizontal row direction of columns of visible ro
107. 1 This value should not be much smaller as otherwise there may be problems in printouts Note When the Stretch content property has been selected the Module size value is overridden The QRCode barcode allows chaining up to 16 symbols and achieve an accordingly higher data capacity When reading chained symbols the reading unit stores the data and assembles it Only when all symbols have been read is the data passed on This appears to subsequent processes as if a huge symbol had been read When this box is checked the according symbol is part of a structurally chained group Otherwise the symbol is self contained When this property has been selected the properties Structured append total and Structured append index must have a value they will also be activated in the Properties window The field for the Structured append identifier is also activated but it is not mandatory for it to have a value 4 192 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Structured append total Structured append index Structured append identifier Chapter 4 Forms Development This property indicates how many symbols there are in the structurally chained group to which the symbol belongs Valid values are between 2 and 16 The value 1 means that the group consists of one single symbol and therefore the symbol is self contained This property is normally deactivated It gets activated when the Enable structured append property is activated
108. 2 Height 60 Pt This example shows three otherwise identically defined tables with different height and position of the first leftmost row element a narrow label which has been colored black in order to be more visible This allows an extensive control of the selector 4 211 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development The following steps are only necessary when the Allow growth property is active 4 Setting the position of the scrollbar The scrollbar appears outside of the table container at its right border The default value of the Scrollbar distance property of 2 Pt has been a good value based on experience If necessary the height and width of the table container must be adjusted to prevent the scrollbar from appearing too detached from the table The appearance of the scrollbar is controlled from the operating system and cannot be controlled from Snapform Specifying the detail report When the table contains more rows than can be displayed an additional page is created when the document is printed This additional page is called report This report is a very simply designed table which must be configured The report is only displayed in the Print preview As the Snapform Designer cannot create a Print preview the form must be saved and then displayed in the Snapform Viewer At this time the Print preview can be created by clicking on the Print preview tool Moving to the following
109. 2 5 4 4 2 6 4 4 2 7 4 4 2 8 4 4 3 4 4 3 1 4 4 3 2 4 4 3 3 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 4 5 1 4 4 5 2 4 4 5 3 4 4 6 4 4 6 1 4 4 6 2 4 4 6 3 4 4 6 4 Table of contents Importing existing background pages Creating empty pages Properties of new forms Document pages Adding and removing pages Page properties Graphical elements Lines Rectangles Covers Images and logos Text The Label tool HTML tags and attribute usable in Snapform Form layer Labels and expression container Entry fields Entry fields in general Text fields Multiline fields Numeric fields Date fields Masked input Password fields Examples of entry fields Check boxes and Radio buttons Check box Radio buttons Setting up radio buttons Examples of Check boxes and Radio buttons Selection lists 1D Barcodes The Barcode tool 1D barcodes supported in Snapform 1D barcode examples 2D Barcodes 2D barcodes in general Aztec barcode PDF 417 Barcode Datamatrix 16 17 19 20 21 22 26 26 33 39 45 54 55 63 64 64 65 65 72 76 79 88 93 98 101 103 103 108 112 114 117 125 125 138 144 151 151 152 163 174 SnapForm Designer 5 x Table of contents User Manual 4 4 6 5 QRCode 184 4 4 7 Tables 195 4 4 7 1 The Table tool 197 4 4 7 2 Assembling tables 207 4 4 7 3 Examples of tables 218 4 4 8 Active elements 222 4 4 8 1 Hyperlinks 222 4 4 8 2 Infopoints 229 4 4 8 3 Buttons 240 4 4 8 4 Applied active elem
110. 3 4 Chapter 4 Forms Development the radio button group and they are moved along with the container when it gets moved around on the workspace There are cases where the option of a check box or radio button is repeated for example in a form with a response page In this situation add the check box at the given place If there are radio buttons make sure that the newly placed check box will not be part of the radio button group This new check box will be set read only so that it cannot be manually overridden Let s assume this check box neets to repeat the state of cb001 its value will get the expression Cb001 When checking the form in Preview mode this box will always repeat the state of Cb001 Examples of Check boxes and Radio buttons The document checkbuttons gdf see Fig 4 92 Draft Mode and Fig 4 93 shown in the Snapform Viewer filled out contains various examples of check boxes and radio buttons After selecting the Field elements in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the expression as far as there is one assigned to the field 4 114 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 92 Check box and radio button examples of checkbuttons qdf in Draft mode Editor Preview 4 115 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 93 Filledoutcheck
111. 5 x User Manual Fig 3 11 The Edit Menu Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Delete Select all Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Eo Format Controls View Tool G Undo Ctrl z A Redo Ctrl 8 Cut Ctrl x B Copy Ctrl C M Paste Ctrl y J Delete Delete Select all Ctr Group Ctrl G Add new page Insert new page Delete this page The most recent action is undone The last action is repeated also undoes the Undo command The selected elements are copied to the clipboard and removed from the workspace Form elements retain all their properties except tab order The selected elements are copied to the clipboard and remains in the workspace Form elements retain all their properties except tab order The contents of the clipboard are pasted onto the workspace as far as this is possible All properties retained when placing the elements into the clipboard are applied That means the positions of the elements are the same as they were when the elements were copied The selected elements are deleted from the workspace without being placed into the clipboard All elements on the workspace are selected Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 3 User Manual Using the Snapform Designer Group The selected elements are ordered into a group The group gets a default name Group and can be treated as a single form element see Fig 3 12 Fig 3 12 A grou g p Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format
112. 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 20 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference numeric is between 1 and 1 Returns the Cosine of the entered value The entered value is assumed to be in degrees The full circle corresponds to 360 Acos x Asin x Atan x Sin x Tan x other Math functions see func_math2 qdf Cover x Math function Rounds the absolute value of the entered value to the next greater integer x numeric any value numeric Returns without consideration of a minus sign the entered value rounded up to the next greater integer This function corresponds to the equation Cover x gt x Ceil x Abs x This function is therefore for positive numbers identical with Ceil x for negative numbers the returned value differs from the result of Ceil x by 1 Ceil x Round x Floor x Trunc x see func_math1 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 21 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 22 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference createGUID Identifier function Creates an unique identifier GUID Global Unique Identifier This function has no arguments String Creates a structured string consisting of 36 randomly selected characters The algo
113. 90 X in stock OS 4 8 ihavethe blue at 4 523 Liter 36 184 00 X in stock ISFO 12 15 13 18 19 00 Number of units 2 407 Total 46 946 25 4 lt gt 1 1 4 220 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 148 Examples from tables qdf in the Snapform Viewer Print preview Fig 4 149 Report of item 3 of tables qdf in the Snapform Viewer Chapter 4 Forms Development In Fig 4 148 the same form is shown in the Print preview AAA Print preview Print preview View Zoom O K amp lt 7 174 gt LASA Tables various examples 1 Storage Unit In First floor Second floor Shed Name First name See supplement sheet Account number See supplement sheet Account type Out 23 232 Units 3 432 Units 44 Units Date of birth Membership Balance Number Item 2 407 m Number of units In Fig 4 148 finally the report for item 3 is shown Unit price Total 46 946 25 Print preview Units Amount 46 946 25 5 Fit 1 LX1068 LX316 LH3747 Fit2 LH454 UA355 LH458 ZRH 07 00 07 10 09 05 08 15 09 55 12 15 13 18 19 00 Account type Checking OOGA Print preview View Zoom OD KS 7374 gt YM AX Account overview Account number 234123122 664 03 IN 98797987 54 88 Savings 4 221 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 8 4 4 8 1 Fig 4 150 Hyperlink cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Active eleme
114. 90817324897129347 1 m a a al ae Be a 4 ae oot Ge E 4 194 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 7 Chapter 4 Forms Development 1 Bcq004 ORCode barcode Format and Encoding Automatic 2 Bcq000 QRCode barcode encoding Binary for calculating the data stream the function getBytes MI000 was used 3 Bcq001 QRCode barcode Encoding Numeric 4 Bcq002 ORCode barcode Encoding Alphanumeric 5 Bcq003 QRCode barcode Encoding Kanji 6 Bcq005 QRCode barcode Encoding Automatic Error correction level L 7 Bcq006 QRCode barcode Encoding Automatic Error correction level M 8 Bcq007 QRCode barcode Encoding Automatic Error correction level Q 9 Bcq008 QRCode barcode Encoding Automatic Error correction level H All barcodes represent the text specified in the entry field according to the specific properties In the example file the text can be changed and the symbols change accordingly The item 5 symbol encoding Kanji requires entries in that particular character set range Tables In many forms data is represented in tabular form Often the number of rows of the table is variable and cannot be predicted With paper forms an optimum number of rows must be assumed which more often depends on the available space When the table needs more rows attachments must be used In electronic forms there is the possibility to allow tables to grow and to move down the subsequent form elements
115. Background color of the Aztec barcode field By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color The background color is only applied when the Transparent check box is unchecked Color of the Aztec barcode By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color Note Standards for the Aztec barcode may contain requirements concerning the colors to be used and should be referred to Also note that only the full colors Black Cyan Magenta and Yellow are printed as full color unless specific spot colors are used and that good printing quality can be 4 157 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Stretch content Encoding Config type Chapter 4 Forms Development achieved only with these colors at 100 saturation as there will not be screened modules This check box determines whether the symbol is scaled to the size of the Aztec barcode field When the box is checked the symbol is scaled to fit into the field perimeter The value for the Module size property is in this case overridden When the box is unchecked the symbol is displayed using the specified module size and it is centered in the field Attention When this property is active the symbol may be scaled down so far with greater amount of data that it cannot be printed out properly anymore and the resulting module size will be too small Note When thi
116. Clicking on this property field opens the expression editor In most of the cases the value is the result of a calculation When this box is checked the PDF 417 barcode field gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the PDF 417 barcode field 4 167 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Top Width Height Transparent Back color Barcode color Stretch content Chapter 4 Forms Development Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the PDF 417 barcode field Width of the bounding box of the PDF 417 barcode field Height of the bounding box of the PDF 417 barcode field The background of the PDF 417 barcode is set to transparent no covering background color with this check box This property is unchecked by default Background color of the PDF 417 barcode field By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color The background color is only applied when the Transparent check box is unchecked Color of the barcode By clickin
117. Default 10 260 280 300 320 340 300 380 400 fi EA Sea EA E A 48 0978 47 2826 96 00 12 00 Hide button Number value Configure List Length Link to object p Controls Tools Find amp replace a a 3 E z i g l aoe lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the Combo box field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the Combo box field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 96 4 118 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 96 Properties ofa Combo box field Properties of Combo box Property Name Category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top width Height Value LiO00 Default 10 10 43 0976 47 2026 96 00 12 00 O OBIE Read only Single use Field Tooltip text Editable Show values Hide button Number value Configure List Length Link ta object HOBO OO Name The na
118. Fig 4 30 Cover tool cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Helpful Hint The Rectangle element is a path A filled rectangle can be simulated to some extent by overlaying the Rectangle element with a Cover element see section 4 3 5 1 of the same size Covers Cover elements are areas used to cover regions of a background image They are always at the bottom of the element layers and they cannot cover any other form elements The Cover tool creates rectangular and oval cover areas After selecting the tool a cursor with a cover in default size appears see Fig 4 30 ya Note The cover area is represented in black so that it is easier to position it Assigned to the Cover tool is a black rectangle 60 pt wide and 12 pt high with a line width of 1 pt Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Cr and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first cover placed in a form has therefore the name crooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 31 the first cover of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 31 Newly created cover Chapter 4 Forms Development Snapform Designer New form Fie Edit Format Controls View Tools Help for Oo 11 9 YRBOSRanme S bai Properties of Cover Property Value Name cro00 Category Stylesheet Default 10
119. Forms Development When the option Binary has been selected a true binary data stream must be made available for compression This means that normal text must be pre compressed In order to do this the functions Compress x Of getBytes string Can be used In the example below the following expression is used for item 4 Compress M1000 Note When the data does not correspond to the selected compression method the symbol will not be displayed When debugging this should be the first property to be verified The PDF 417 barcode allows you to chain up to 127 symbols and achieve an accordingly higher data capacity This special version of the barcode is called Macro PDF 417 When reading chained symbols the reading unit stores the data and assembles it Only when all symbols have been read will the data be passed on This appears to subsequent processes as if a huge symbol had been read When this box is checked the according symbol is part of a chained group Otherwise the symbol is self contained When this property has been selected the properties Macro unit count and Macro unit number must have a value they will also be activated in the Properties window The field for the property Macro ID is also activated but it is not mandatory that it has a value Itis possible to specify in advance the file name for the retrieved chained data That file name is specified in this property This property is normally deactiva
120. Forms Development When this box is checked the Snapform Viewer displays the Export data button When this button is clicked in the Snapform Viewer data will be exported from the form When this box is checked the Snapform Viewer displays the Verify button When this button is clicked in the Snapform Viewer the form will be validated according to the specified validation rules When this box is checked the Snapform Viewer displays the Sign button When this button is clicked in the Snapform Viewer the process to digitally sign the form is initiated When this box is checked the Snapform Viewer displays the Print button When this button is clicked in the Snapform Viewer the form is printed to the default printer When this box is checked the Snapform Viewer displays the Send data button When this button is clicked in the Snapform Viewer the form data will be submitted to the specified server eFiling When all check boxes are selected the form appears in the Snapform Viewer as shown in Fig 4 174 4 273 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 174 The Actions toolbar in the Snapform Viewer 4 8 4 Fig 4 175 The Form settings Validation window AAA Chapter 4 Forms Development s_func_math1 qdf Snapform Viewer Ld gt Do e n P clear entries a verity form amp import gata Export data amp sign form D Print ba Send data
121. Label text consists of constant part and the value of field Tx000 the value of field Tx000 is transferred when leaving the field Lb011 Label text consists of constant part and the value of the label Lb025 Lb012 Label associated with check box C000 the label becomes active and clicking changes the state of the check box Lb013 Label font type specified in stylesheet Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 45 Label examples of labels2 qdfin Draft mode Fig 4 46 Label examples of labels2 qdfin the Snapform Viewer Chapter 4 Forms Development Draft Preview lt h gt ordered and unordered bsts in a table lt h4 gt lt table width 150 callspacing 1 cellpadding 1 nules alf bgoolor BCODODE gt lt gt N labels2 qdf Snapform Viewer Labels Part 2 HTML formatted text 1 Text with HTML Entities p 2 Eugen My name is Eugen and this is good 7 Heading levels 6 Different font sizes and attributes in the same feld and even combinations are possible Heading H1 8 ordered and unordered lists in a table Heading H2 1 item 1 an item 2 item2 another item Heading H3 and even a picture Heading H4 1 1 gt Heading H5 a a A whole block of text to be centered lt Lb000 Label text in HTML with special characters as HTML entities Lb007 Label text consists of constant part and the value of field Tx000 the value of field Tx000 is t
122. Link ta object The common properties of entry fields are described in section 4 4 2 1 The following properties are either specific for date fields or have additional information pertinent to the description of the common properties The base format of the date entry is controlled via stylesheet see section 4 7 1 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Value Date format Minimum date Chapter 4 Forms Development Helpful Hint When unexpected results occur in the way the date is displayed verifying the stylesheet in the stylesheet editor may provide an explanation Note n order fora date entered as default to be properly displayed it must be entered in the expression editor in the format yryyMMddHHmm The presentation will then be as defined in the Date format property This property allows you to override the base format of the stylesheet and a differing date format can be specified Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu from which the available formats can be selected It is also possible to define a custom format which will then also be available in the drop down menu The building blocks for the date format have the following meaning yy Year two digits e g 08 yyyy Year four digits e g 2008 M Month without leading zero e g 5 MM Month with leading zero e g 05 d Day without leading zero e g 7 dd Day with leading zero e g 07 H Hour without leading zero e g 8 HH Hour wit
123. P ATE ATOSE TEET Horizontal alignment Vertical alignment Back color Text color Rotation angle Transparent Checkbox Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form Page 1 re a 4 ra a E E m E a a a B m m m E lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG ia The length and the width of the label can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor 4 55 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 42 Properties ofa label Name Category Chapter 4 Forms Development point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the label are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 42 Properties of Label Property Value Mame Lbooo Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Horizontal alignment Vertical alignment Back color Text color Rotation angle Transparent Checkbox The name of the label in the document This name can be changed Assignment to one or several categori
124. Snapform the stylesheets with the font names Arial and Courier were the default stylesheets Clicking on the New button adds a new stylesheet Clicking on the Clone button creates a copy of the currently selected stylesheet and adds it to the list Clicking on the Delete button removes the current highlighted stylesheet The field Name holds the name of the stylesheet This is the name under which the stylesheet is listed in the Stylesheet property in the form The Date format field displays a drop down list of default date formats This default format can be overridden in the Date format property of the field The format specified in the stylesheet is also used for entering dates into the field In the Font settings area the font used in the form element is selected The drop down menu Font name is a list of available fonts These font names are either actual fonts installed in the system such as Arial or Times or logical fonts such as SansSerif or Serif Logical fonts are fonts where just the main feature is specified but the font actually used is defined on operating system level By clicking on the Add font button additional fonts installed in the system can be added for use in Snapform A file open dialog opens where the font files can be selected At the moment Snapform supports only the TrueType font format ttf Note Fonts are available with a wide variety of licensing models It is fully within the responsibility of t
125. Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Description 5 2 7 Type Type of operands Description 5 2 8 Type Type of operands Description 5 2 9 Type Chapter 5 Expression language reference Remainder This operator divides the operand x by the operand y determines the remainder Modulo and returns it as the result The result is also numeric if both operands are numeric Otherwise the result is empty Note With a division by 0 or an empty value the result is NaN Not a Number and there is no specific warning about the fact that subsequent results will be incorrect X y Comparison x and y boolean numeric string date must be of the same type Compares the operands and returns the result If the operands are equal the result is TRUE if they are different it is FALSE and if they are of different type the result is empty xl y Comparison x and y boolean numeric string date must be of the same type Compares the operands and returns the result If the operands are different the result is TRUE if they are equal it is FALSE and if they are of different type the result is empty X gt y Comparison Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Type of operands Description 5 2 10 Type Type of operands Description 5 2 11 Type Type of operands Description Chapter 5 Expression language reference x and y numeric Compares the two operands and returns the result If the operan
126. Software 2 2 2 3 Chapter 2 Installation As mentioned above the Snapform Viewer and the Snapform Designer require Java Runtime Engine 1 4 or newer Further system software is not required For electronic data transmission of forms and forms data to a centralized back end system an active internet connection is required This requirement is application dependent Preparing the system A prerequisite for the installation of the Snapform Viewer or the Snapform Designer is the Sun Java Runtime Engine version 1 4 or newer These components may already be part of your operating system or they can be downloaded from the Sun website http www java com for Windows or from the Apple website http www apple com for Macintosh Standard Installation The installation procedure for the Snapform Designer and the Snapform Viewer is simple and straightforward due to a guided and easy to follow installation routine When the Java Runtime Engine is not available on a Windows system it will automatically be downloaded and preconfigured by the installer or it can be downloaded from the Sun website http www java com When both the Snapform Designer and the Snapform Viewer are installed it is recommended to first install the Designer and then the Viewer The installation order only has an effect on the filetype assignments Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 2 3 1 Windows Macintosh 2 3 2 Windows Chapter 2 Installa
127. Sqrt x Math function Calculates the square root of the entered value x numeric value greater than 0 numeric Returns the square root of the entered value If the entered value is negative the square root is not defined and the error symbol is shown Operator x y see func_math2 qdf Str x String function Converts the entered value to a string x String numeric date boolean String Returns the entered value represented as string Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 73 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference Len x SubStr string start count see func_string1 qdf StrTotal table column Table function Assembles the table values of column column to a string table Table name column Column number or field name of the column from which the values are to be assembled to a string String Concatenates the field values of the column column in table table to a string The character is used as separator TblValues table tbl_ start tbl_ end row_start row_end delimiter column column Total table column TimeTotal table column see func_table1 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 74 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference SubArray byte_array
128. This approach is viable for on screen versions of the form because scrolling is necessary anyway The problem appears when the form must be printed out nevertheless The pagination is often an integral part of the form and may not be modified easily Snapform has a great emphasis on the correct representation of a page Therefore when a data overflow happens with a table an additional 4 195 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 132 Elements ofa table in Snapform Chapter 4 Forms Development page is created and in the actual form summarized data of the table can be shown The base for tables in Snapform is a Table container to which the individual table elements are assigned The behavior of the table is determined in the properties of the Table container Tables have various visual elements in Snapform which are shown in Fig 4 132 ony Ea 2 3 4 E 3 item 3 322 1 4 Item 4 543 5 Item 5 675 5 1 Selector The purpose of this element is selecting a whole row of the table The selector is numbered where the initial value is a property of the table 2 Field in the table Within the table it is possible to navigate using the cursor keys 3 Active field This field is active meaning that it has the focus 4 Active row This row has become active when the field item 3 has been activated 5 Scrollbars When there are more table rows than can be displayed in the available
129. This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence which is logical because the barcode is not an active element When the box is checked the barcode field will be printed When the box is checked the barcode field is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated in barcode fields and cannot be changed Clicking in the property field opens the expression editor for entering an expression Barcode fields may contain either a constant value for example to identify a document or the result of an expression more frequently Note Se f checking digits of the barcode are automatically calculated and must therefore not be taken into account in an expression The same applies 4 130 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Locked Left Top Width Height Transparent Back color Chapter 4 Forms Development for the Start and Stop characters in the Codabar symbology which are specified in the according barcode field property When this box is checked the barcode field gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the barcode field
130. Using the Snapform Designer The selected elements are copied to the clipboard Form elements retain all their properties except tab order The contents of the clipboard are pasted onto the workspace as far as this is possible All properties retained when placing the elements into the clipboard are applied This means that the position of the elements are the same as they were when the elements were copied The selected elements are deleted from the workspace without being placed into the clipboard The most recent action is undone The last action is repeated also undoes the Undo command The next three icons are drop down icons which work like submenus The most recently used option remains displayed as an icon and can be directly repeated This drop down icon opens the same submenu as the Format gt Align menu see Fig 3 14 The selected form elements are mutually aligned The alignment happens according to the bounding box of the respective form elements The upper three items control the horizontal alignment and the lower three items control the vertical alignment The elements are aligned horizontally to their left borders The elements are aligned horizontally to their centers The elements are aligned horizontally to their right borders The elements are aligned vertically to their top borders Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Middle Bottom Drop down icon Make same size Same width Same h
131. When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 59 Properties ofa multiline text field Value Number of lines Chapter 4 Forms Development The other features of the multiline text field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 55 Properties of Multiline text Field Property Name Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder 10 Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 43 0978 Top 31 7935 Width 96 00 Height 46 2857 Read only Single use Field Tooltip text Mumber of lines 0 OBIE Center single line Link to object The common properties of entry fields are described in section 4 4 2 1 The following properties are either specific for multiline text fields or have additional information pertinent to the description of the common properties It is not possible to enter HTML formatted text The maximum number of lines which the field can handle When the value is set to 0 there is no limitation in the number of lines 4 78 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Center single line 4 4 2 4 Chapter 4 Forms Development Attention When the number of lines is not limited and the bottom of the field has been reached any further entry occurs blind This text cannot be displayed and will not be printed either Since there are no scroll bars in the field that text remains invisible When data is s
132. a 8 SansSerif 16 Type True Type b SansSerif 8 Type True Type 1 B SansSerif 9 Type True Type 2 SansSerif 10 Type True Type 3 SansSerif 11 Type True Type b amp SansSerif 12 Type True Type a i I SansSerif 14 Type True Type 1 SansSerif 16 Type True Type Fonts i SansSerif 18 Type True Type 1 SansSerif 8 Type True Type ba SansSerif 9 Type True Type eFiling SansSerif 10 Type True Type E SansSerif 11 Type True Type Up SansSerif 12 Type True Type gt UB SansSerif 14 Type True Type i SansSerif 16 Type True Type i SansSerif 18 Type True Type Serverside Interaction C The Fonts dialog is an overview of the fonts referred to in the form and it is primarily an aid to the form developer to determine whether the license terms for the various fonts are honored Note t is in the sole responsibility of the form developer to ensure that the license terms associated with the various fonts are honored Ringler Informatik AG refuses any responsibility for possible font license violations 4 279 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 8 Fig 4 179 The Form settings eFiling window Allow eFiling This dialog only displays information eFiling One of the great advantages of electronic forms is the ability to transfer seamlessly the information to the associated business process This data transfer is called particularly in government environments eFiling It
133. able length It has several self checking options e Simple check digit modulo 10 e Check digit modulo 10 applied to a code already being checked with a check digit modulo 10 e Combination of check digit modulo 11 and check digit modulo 10 Valid characters 0123456789 4 140 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual EAN 13 and UPC A EAN 8 and UPC E Chapter 4 Forms Development Application libraries retail business logistics This code is considered obsolete and is no longer supported in modern scanning devices These two codes are the so called big retail business codes as they are used in retail business all over the world They are numeric codes with a pre defined length UPC A 12 characters EAN 13 with 13 characters The structure is identical 1 UPC A or 2 EAN 13 digits country type code followed by 5 digits manufacturer code then 5 digits product code and 1 check digit In certain cases the country code can consist of 3 digits which leads to a 4 digit manufacturer code The EAN 13 representation of an UPC A code has a leading 0 Because of the encoding this will lead to identical symbols so that a product labeled with UPC A can be read correctly with a scanner designed for EAN 13 Valid characters 0123456789 Application retail business The EAN 13 code using a specific country code is also used to represent ISBN and ISSN numbers For books and periodicals the EAN 13 or UPC A code can be expan
134. action Buttons in the sense of other forms systems are unknown in Snapform Instead of this there is a mechanism which activates the most common actions normally assigned to buttons in the Snapform Viewer via specific flags Estimates say that this together with internal hyperlinks handles about 97 of all button actions within a form These form actions are specified in the Security settings of the form see section 4 8 3 3 Applied active elements A help system An application of active elements is a help system for a form Help systems are often neglected but they are worth the effort particularly with forms that are rather complex or very frequently used by laypersons The reduction of user support effort pays very quickly for setting up a good help system 4 240 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development When setting up a help system be aware that it may be intended for users which are not familiar with the form but that it must not slow down or annoy the experienced user This means that any kind of help must be displayed only as a reaction to an action by the user Overly active and persistant help will be perceived quite quickly as disturbance A help system consists of several levels 1 direct notes on field level The first level of the help system should state what has to be entered into the according field This is an addition to the description of the field on the form itsel
135. alled you must first remove older versions using the Snapform PDF Converter s uninstaller Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 2 4 Fig 2 1 Window to enter the license key Chapter 2 Installation Registering The Snapform Viewer can not be registered This section is therefore relevant for the Snapform Designer only A recently downloaded and installed version of the Snapform Designer will be launched in Demo mode In order to activate the licensed functionality the license key must be entered The license key is normally sent to you by Ringler Informatik The key also contains information about the licensed function range and the number of users After selecting the menu item Enter license key in the Help menu the window to enter the license key opens see Fig 2 1 Product registration Registration and license agreement Thank you for purchasing this product Please enter your personal registration key and verify your user name and company name User name lax Wyss Company name Prodok Engineering 1 user licenses Product level Enterprise version License key c wus PT hie Le Paste from clipboard OK Cancel Enter the license information in this window Note that the values in User name and Company name must be the same as specified in the order for the license key The License level field is filled out automatically when the license key is validated The license key is easi
136. allows precise numeric positioning of the entry field Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the entry field Width of the bounding box of the entry field Height of the bounding box of the entry field When this box is checked the entry field is marked as read only and its content cannot be manually changed The value may still be changed as the result of an expression A read only entry field is still part of the tab order and its content may be copied to the clipboard with lt Ctrl gt lt C gt respectively lt Cmd gt lt C gt Note This property is not available for Password fields 4 68 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Single use field Tooltip text Chapter 4 Forms Development There is information which may no longer be modified after initially filling out the form and whose fields must therefore be protected In Snapform this protection occurs in Single use fields which can be modified until the form is saved for the first time After that the field is marked as read only When this box is checked the entry field can be modified until the form is saved for the first time After saving for the first time the entry field will be marked as read only Note This property is not available for Password fields The Tooltip text is help text that appears when the mouse cursor hovers over the field for a
137. alphanumeric characters Positive integer Calculates a checksum over the entered value value using the MOD 10 algorithm The result is a integer which can for example be used in certain 1D barcodes checkMod10 value getMod10r value checkMod10r value see func_consist qdf getMod10r value Consistency check function Returns a checksum created with the Recursive MOD 10 algorithm over the entered value value Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 35 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference value number or string containing numeric or alohanumeric characters Positive integer Calculates a checksum over the entered value value using the Recursive MOD 10 algorithm The result is a integer which can for example be used in certain 1D barcodes checkMod10r value getMod10 value checkMod10 value see func_consist qdf getMonth date_value Date function Shows the number of the month of the date date_value date_value valid date Whole number between 1 and 12 Returns the number of the month of the entered date date_value The entered date may be in the future or in the past This function is part of the inverse function of Date year month day getDay date_value getYear date_value Date year month day other date functions see fun
138. alysis the following questions must be asked and answered e I the business process associated with this form already fully known and understood e s the form the only carrier of the associated business process e Which information is needed input e When in the process is a particular piece of information needed e What information must be displayed output e When in the process must a particular piece of information be displayed e Which output medium screen office printer copier printshop is intended for the form e Which interactive elements are needed e Which plausibility tests and validations are needed e What kind of further calculations are needed e Will the form be pre filled e Will the entered data be transferred to a back end system and if so in which form e Are there any layout templates or style guides e Must the form be accessible Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development e Should the form be filled out by the same user for different instances e Should the form be used exclusively in electronic workflows or should it be possible to print out the empty form and fill it out by hand e Are there any repetitive elements Based on the answers to these questions the form can now be defined and designed As part of the planning of the form certain highlight colors must be defined Snapform does this in the stylesheets which are explain
139. anatory Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Macintosh Linux 2 3 3 Chapter 2 Installation When the installation routine has successfully completed the Snapform Viewer is ready to run The Macintosh version of the Snapform Viewer is available as disk image in the dmg format After mounting the disk image double click the icon to start the installer The installation steps are self explanatory When the installation routine has successfully completed the Snapform Viewer is ready to run The Linux version of the Snapform Viewer is available as a shell installer After downloading the file launch the installer shell script The installation steps are self explanatory Note The installer attempts to write to the usr local directory It may therefore be necessary to run the installer script with raised privileges using the sudo command When the installation routine has successfully completed the Snapform Viewer is ready to run Installing the Snapform PDF Converter The Snapform PDF Converter installer is a exe file After downloading the installation wizard can be started at any time by double clicking the exe file The installation steps are defined in the wizard and are self explanatory When the installation routine has successfully completed the Snapform PDF Converter is ready to run Note The Snapform PDF Converter is a NET application When a newer version of the Snapform PDF Converter has to be inst
140. anguage reference Time hour minute second Date function Creates a time object from the arguments hour Integer corresponding to the hours number minute Integer corresponding to the minutes number second optional Integer corresponding to the seconds number Time Creates a time value from the three arguments The value for hour should be between 0 and 24 The value for minute should be between 0 and 59 Higher values are converted and the hours number is increased accordingly The value for second is optional and should be between 1 and 59 Higher values are converted and accordingly added to the minutes and hours The entries should be integers however any digits after the decimal sign will be ignored getHour time_value getMinute time_value other date functions see func_time qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 79 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 80 Category Short description Arguments Result Chapter 5 Expression language reference TimeTotal table column Table function Adds the values of the column column to a time table Table name column Column number or field name of the column from which the values are to be summed up Time sums the field values of the column column up as a time and returns the result It is important to make sure that the column column is actually formatted as time Total table
141. apform View Batch conversion Help Open PDF file Open Snapform background layer Save as Snapform background layer Preferences Exit The File menu see Fig 4 3 contains the following items A normal File Open dialog opens to select a PDF file The selected file is converted and the result is displayed in the Preview window A normal File Open dialog to select a Snapform background image file hdt opens The selected file is displayed in the Preview window A normal File Save dialog opens for selecting the location to save the current Snapform Background image It will be saved in the hdt format A dialog with some settings to optimize the conversion process opens Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Exit The View menu of the Snapform PDF Converter Fig 4 4 Zoom in Zoom out Original size Select page Fig 45 TheSelect page submenu of the Snapform PDF Converter Chapter 4 Forms Development The application exits Convert PDF to Snapform Zoom out Original size Select page The View menu see Fig 4 4 is used to control the display in the Preview window It contains the following items Clicking in the Preview window enlarges the view by about 10 Clicking in the Preview window reduces the view by about 10 The view in the Preview window is displayed in original size 100 When a multiple page document is open a submenu appears to select the pa
142. apform versions is fully compatible to UTF 8 which means that there will be no incompatibilities with older Snapform forms Compress x SubArray byte_array start count see func_string2 qdf and func_barcode qdf getCol Table function Shows the column number of the according field in the respective table This function has no arguments numeric integer Returns the number of the column in the table of the field calling the function This value can be used in subsequent calculations Calling this function only makes sense in connection with tables When the calling field is not part of a table the function returns the value 1 getRow Cell table column row see func_table2 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 28 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 29 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference getContent url Special functions Loads the text contents of url url valid URL The HTML 3 2 compatible part of URL is loaded This function is used to retrieve contents of URLs The contents has to be called from a valid path url This function supports most URI protocols http https file ftp etc The contents must be compatible with HTML 3 2 The primary use of this function is to load text into Text fields Info points or Labels any place where HTML formatted text can be displayed Anot
143. asured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the image field Width of the image field in Points Height of the image field in Points Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Image name Stretch content X and Stretch content Y Chapter 4 Forms Development When the image is to be directly inserted into the image field its name is specified in this property field Clicking in this field opens a drop down menu with the names of the images already inserted into the document Clicking on the button opens a normal File Open dialog in which the image file can be specified An image specified via this property is stored within the document and can be reused in other image fields A typical use of this feature is for logos appearing on every page of the document Only in rare cases the inserted image has exactly the same size as the image field These check boxes control whether the image is displayed in its original size or whether it will be scaled to fit into the image field in the according direction The following combinations are possible e Both boxes unchecked The image is displayed in its original size Parts of the image not fitting into the image field are cut off e Stretch content X checked and Stretch content Y unchecked The image is scaled proportionally so that it completely fits into the image field When it is proportionally wider than the image field the width is the same as of the ima
144. attach Sch PH C 3 service corp see instructions City or town state and ZIP code D Total assets see instructions W 4 Schedule M 3 required attach Sch M 3 E Check if 1 L Initial return 2 L Final retum _ 3 L Name change 4 LL Address change ta Gross receipts or sales b Less retums and allowances 2 Cost of goods sold Schedule A line 8 2 3 Gross profit Subtract line 2 from line 1c 3 4 Dividends Schedule C line 19 _ 4 g 5 Interest 5 8 6 Gross rents 6 7 Gross royalties 7 8 Capital gi et INCOMor s ech Schedule D Form 1120 nmmmmmmmm 8 9 Net gain 10 Part Ul line 17 attach Form 4797 nmm 9 10 Other incom schedule mmama 10 Total incor es At Compens e4 n 12 a Salaries ar ditt 13 8 Repairs anc 14 3 Bad dob 15 A S 16 Rents 16 S 17 Taxes and licenses 17 5 18 Interest _ 18 19 Charitable contrib 19 20 Depreciation from Form 4562 not claimed on Schedule A or elsewhere on return attach Form 4562 20 5 5 L21 Depletion 21 lt 1 1 2 09 In order to make all elements visible Fig 4 34 shows the same document in the draft mode of Snapform Designer The actual Cover element item 3 in the document is selected In addition the window Tools gt Controls shows the element structure of the sample form Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 34 Sample Cover elements in covers gdf in Draft mode Chapter 4 Forms Development Snapf
145. b order for the data entry table but also the one in the form itself When this value is changed the whole tab order of the form is modified Chances are that the same order number may be used twice Width of the according column in the report table Base value is width of the according form element When displaying in the listing window or in the print view the columns are scaled proportionally to the total width It is possible to enter the percentage of the total width into this column 4 205 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Header Show total Column for message Style for report title Chapter 4 Forms Development This is the title above the column It appears in the data entry table as well as in the print view This text can be freely chosen and it has no equivalent on the form itself This check box has a double function When it is checked and there is a phantom table a button to open the data entry window appears to the left of the according field In general at least with columns from Number fields the total sum of the entered values is calculated and displayed in the form in the data entry window and in the print view Note n order to display a button to open the data entry window in phantom tables at least one of these check boxes must be checked Below this table various properties of the report table are shown In the print view of a form with tables containing more rows than can be displayed t
146. be active With this transmission method the same scripts and applications can be used on the server side that would have been used with HTML forms 4 281 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 8 2 4 8 8 3 Recepient name Target URL Description 4 8 8 4 Button name Tooltip Chapter 4 Forms Development File name When files are transferred their name must be specified in advance This may either be a static value recommended only for special cases or it may be a dynamically assembled name using an expression Clicking on the expression icon opens the expression editor All field objects and functions are available in the expression editor Target In this area the information for the receiving system is specified This field allows you to specify an additional reference for the post processing units such as name of the department This is the URL to which the transmission will go This may either be a static value or the result of a calculation Clicking on the expression icon opens the expression editor All field objects and functions are available in the expression editor This is the descriptive text for the data transfer Ul settings In this area the eFiling button which appears in the Snapform Viewer and is controlled in the security settings for the form see section 4 8 3 3 can be modified to represent closer the meaning of the eFiling process such as Pay File Su
147. ber Date function Calculates the date which is from the date date_value away by number years date_value valid date number integer Date Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Explanation See also Example 5 3 8 Category Short description Arguments Result Chapter 5 Expression language reference Returns the date which is by number of years apart from the specified date date_value The date argument can be in the future or the past A positive number for number means that the returned date is in the future from the entered data and a negative number means that it is in the relative past For calculations from the current date it is possible to use as the value for date_value the function Today If the value for number has numbers after the decimal sign they will be ignored In order to display the result an accordingly formatted date field is necessary In this function only years are added up The value for days and months remains unchanged If necessary the value for days and months can be changed using the function addDay date_value number or addMonth date_value number addDay date_value number addMonth date_value number Date year month day getYear date_value Today other date functions see func_date qdf Asin x Math function Returns the Arcsine of the argument in degrees x numeric between 1 and 1 numeric is between 90 and 90 Snapform Designer 5 x Use
148. bmit In this field the label of the eFiling button in the Snapform Viewer is specified No entry means that the default label eFiling will be used In this field the tooltip text of the eFiling button in the Snapform Viewer is specified No entry means that the default text will be used 4 282 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 9 Chapter 4 Forms Development Release and deployment The form has been prepared for distribution in the steps explained in section 4 8 In order to distribute it reliably it needs to be thoroughly tested These tests should contain data transfer and database connectivity if these features are used If there are a certain number of forms to be distributed it is recommended that a formal release process be set up This is a necessity when the forms are in an environment which has advanced requirements concerning the documentation of processes The release process is essentially an organizational issue and cannot be supported any further with the Snapform Designer Forms or document management tools can supervise and document these processes For the selection and implementation of such processes support is provided by Ringler Informatik AG The actual release on a technical level is very easy The forms can be made available in a web environment for the Intranet or the Internet just like any other document If access must be restricted the same measures are to be taken as to restrict access t
149. c_date qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 36 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 37 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference getPrintID Identifier function Creates an unique identification string GUID Global Unique Identifier which can be linked to a print job This function has no arguments String Creates a structured string consisting of 36 randomly selected characters The algorithm used for this purpose ensures that this string is unique world wide compared with other strings created in the same way This identifier can for example be used to identify print jobs getPrintidStr length digits createGUID getSessionID getDatalD getRandomString length digits see func_ident qdf getPrintlidStr length digits Identifier function Creates a freely configurable identifier string which can be linked to a print job length length of the string to be created positive integer Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 38 Category Short description Arguments Result Chapter 5 Expression language reference digits optional indicator whether the string should consist of numbers only boolean FALSE when not specified String alphanumeric or numeric depending on the value of the argument digits Creates an uni
150. ced into a table container Line Rectangle Image Infopoint and Password field With these elements the cursor changes to a forbidden cursor when the mouse is moved over a table container see Fig 4 91 Barcode fields may be placed in a table container but are shown only in the first row Attention Datamatrix barcode fields may be placed in a table container but may lead to a serious corruption of the form This step is repeated until the master row is completed see Fig 4 139 Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help noaea x OO enaA aaa nalaah Property Value Draft Preview Name Table000 Ee m oo eo 100 120 140 190 i0 200 220 240 29 280 00 320 240 aso seo ao aa II category L 1 l 1 L 1 l 1 L 1 L L 1 i A Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 51 4045 Siw BEAN Top 42 1348 Width 240 00 Height 72 00 Horizontal row direction of columns 2 of visible rows 3 Allow growth Hide selector Row height Selector distance Scrollbar distance Header text Start numbering at Configure table HBOWHBHBe Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Eas Tx000 Tab 20 NrO00 Tab 30 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG 4 208 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual
151. certain time This text is in many cases the first and simplest help to the according field With increased requirements for accessibility the tooltip text becomes more and more important because screen readers use this information It is particularly important for government forms that the form designer inserts well thought out tooltips Double clicking on this property opens the Edit text value window see Fig 4 48 As indicated in the explanatory text it is also possible to enter text in HTML form for which the same rules apply as for labels Note Tooltip text should be short Therefore it is advised to avoid entering excessive HTML formatting and inserting images Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 48 Edit text value window Edit text value Tips By specifying HTML codes in a text you can make it multiline using multiple Fonts multiple colors and so on Make sure that text starts with lt html gt tag and ends with lt html gt tag Support HTML 3 2 lt HTML gt This is a tooltip text with lt BR gt lt B gt bold faced lt B gt and lt I gt italic lt gt emphasis lt BR gt and multiple lines lt HTML gt The tooltip text defined in Fig 4 48 as HTML text appears in the Snapform Viewer as shown in Fig 4 49 Fig 4 49 Displaying the aes tooltip text Db gt 3 ex tooltip qdf Snapform Viewer X his is a tooltip text with faced and italic empha
152. checked the form can be printed When this box is checked only the values from the entry fields can be printed this option is for example is necessary when the printing occurs on pre printed stock When this box is checked the form can be saved using the Save command It is however not possible to save the form to another location or another name using the Save as command When this box is checked the form can be saved using the Save as command It is possible to save to another location and another name When this box is checked the form data can be exported in XML When this box is checked the form data can be imported in XML When this box is checked the form can be saved in the compact binary format QDF S When this box is checked the form can be saved in the open accessible format QDF A 4 270 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Allow binary export Allow binary import Allow to print incomplete form Allow to print invalid form Import compatible data only allow eSignature Allow eFiling Allow eFiling incomplete form Allow eFiling invalid form Chapter 4 Forms Development When this box is checked the form data can be exported in the encrypted binary data format When this form is checked form data in the encrypted binary data format can be imported When this box is checked the form can be printed even if it is not completely filled out The completeness is controlle
153. ckground color is printed This has the advantage that the visual requirements on screen as well as the requirements for printing can be honored This option allows fields to have the same name When this is the case fields can be duplicated over all the pages of the form and when filled in they automatically get the same value Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Validation rule Page width Page height Paper size Orientation Companion page Visible Printable Background image Chapter 4 Forms Development The expression editor opens and an expression which will be executed when the page opens can be entered Width of the page in the default measuring unit This field is for informational purposes only and cannot be edited Height of the page in the default measuring unit This field is for informational purposes only and cannot be edited Selecting this property opens a drop down menu with a list of the paper sizes as it is available when inserting pages or defining new documents The selected paper size is applied immediately Selecting this property opens a drop down menu with a list of the page orientations as it is available when inserting pages or defining new documents When selecting this property a drop down menu opens with the list of the pages of the document This property is used for the pagination of the finished document This check box controls whether the current page is visible or not
154. clicking on the respective field in the Draft mode Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 6 Chapter 4 Forms Development Text Text is an important part of forms Text belongs partly to the base layout and partly to the Form layer This section covers text belonging to the base layout In order to display text in the base layout the Label element is used Label elements may contain simple or formatted text Note n earlier Snapform versions Labels were besides displaying text also used as a container for expressions This kind of use is considered to be obsolete and should no longer be implemented Simple unformatted text consists of one single font and text size with one single attribute throughout the field This kind of text can be entered as simple text or as HTML The HTML form is necessary for certain attributes such as vertical alignment in the field or text attributes which cannot be set in the properties window of the element Formatted text may consist of several font sizes and types and have changing attributes Formatted text is entered in HTML form All HTML tags not using external resources are supported External stylesheets are not supported either see also section 4 3 6 2 Note When using text in HTML form be aware that the rendering mechanism for HTML text has a lower resolution than for simple text It is possible that text entered in HTML form may not be of the expected quality level when print
155. coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the radio button group Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the radio button group Width of the bounding box of the radio button container Height of the bounding box of the radio button container Setting up radio buttons The components for radio buttons are described in the two previous sections This is how radio buttons are set up The first step is making the radio button container For practical reasons it should cover the area where the radio buttons will be located The second step is placing check boxes within the radio button container These check boxes are automatically assigned to the radio button container and turn into radio buttons When the first check box is placed in a radio button container it changes its color see Fig 4 90 Draft Preview Radio000 4 112 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 91 Radio button container with placed check boxes Chapter 4 Forms Development The color change is the visual indication that the check box has become part of the radio button set This step is now repeated until all intended options have an assigned check box see Fig 4 91 Snapform Designer New form DER Fi
156. cters boolean TRUE or FALSE Validates the formal validity of numbers using the Recursive MOD 10 algorithm When the validation is successful the result is TRUE otherwise it is FALSE When the entered value is not numeric or a string the result is NULL checkMod10 value checkCardNumber value getMod10 value see func_consist qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 18 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 19 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference Compress x Special functions Creates a ZLIB compressed byte sequence from the entered value which may be used in a barcode using the encoding method Binary x String byte sequence numeric values are automatically converted to a string Byte sequence Creates a compressed byte sequence from the entered value which can be used in a 2D barcode using the encoding method Binary This function is almost exclusively used with 2D barcodes Strings are compressed directly Numbers are internally converted to a string and then compressed Date values must be previously converted to a string using the function Str x getBytes string SubArray byte_array start count see func_barcode qdf Cos x Math function Calculates the Cosine of an angle defined in degrees x numeric any value the entered values repeat in cycles of 360 Snapform Designer
157. ctive when Code 128 or EAN 128 are active When it is selected a drop down menu opens with the selection A B C Default is character set A Various barcode symbologies allow the use of self checking characters which improves the reading reliability 4 135 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Guard bars Intercharacter separator Chapter 4 Forms Development When this box is checked a check character is inserted which is also shown in the clear The calculation method of this check character s value depends on the selected barcode type Note For the retail business codes EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E the check character is part of the data and this property only has an effect when the value is shorter by 1 digit 12 digits for EAN 13 11 digits for UPC A and UPC E 7 digits for EAN 8 The Codabar symbology does not have check characters In the PostNet code Code 128 and EAN 128 as well as Code 11 the check character is a fixed component of the symbol In these cases this property creates an additional check character which can be evaluated by the post processing application The built in check character is calculated over the complete length of data With the retail business codes EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E it is possible to frame guard the text line with extended bars at the beginning and the end as well as between the manufacturer code and the product code When this box is checked the symbol is shown w
158. culation for example the combination of constant text with a field value an equal sign is necessary and the text including HTML code if present must be set between double quotes HTML code is if it is not the result of calculations or not too complex directly interpreted and rendered even in Draft mode When the code is more complex tables images or the result of a calculation the text Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Locked Left Top Width Height Horizontal alignment Vertical alignment Chapter 4 Forms Development cannot be displayed directly This kind of text requires viewing the form in the Preview mode to display correctly In this case the label field shows the expression when in Draft mode Further examples of labels with text in HTML form can be found in section 4 3 6 2 When this box is checked the label is locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after unchecking this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the label Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the label Width of the bounding box of the Label element Heig
159. d dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the image field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 37 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 37 Properties ofan image field Name Category Stylesheet Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Image Property Value Mame Imooo Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Image name Stretch content Stretch content Y Horizontal alignment Center Vertical alignment Center Allows input The name of the image field in the document This name can be changed Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For image fields only the Border settings in the General settings tab are used 4 48 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Chapter 4 Forms Development Sequence number of the element in
160. d entries are displayed in this font System responses in interactive dialogs are represented in this font Elements of expressions such as function names or file names are represented in this font if they are part of body text Placeholders for field names and variables are shown in the body text and program listings like this lt field name gt In order to make such Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 Chapter 1 Introduction espressions work these placeholders must be replaced with actual field names Expressions and program code in listings are represented in this font Screenshots Screenshots help you find your way around the screen represent elements of the user interface as well as to visually represent examples The Snapform Designer is platform independent and it uses functions of the operating system for GUI elements it is possible that the actual display on screen differs from the images shown in this manual This manual uses screenshots from a Windows and from a Mac OS X environment in a non specific manner When platform specific features are shown they are clearly indicated Note n some cases it is possible that screenshots have been edited to make certain features more clear It is assumed that users of the Snapform Designer are familiar with their computer and understand the basic operation of their operating system as well as typical applications In Step by Step instructions
161. d the selectors is controlled Current row background color is the highlight color for the current row the row which contains a field which is active Current row border color is the color of the border of the highlighted area of the current row Selected row background color is the highlight color for the selected row selected by clicking on the selector field Selected row border color is the color of the border of the selection area of the selected row Counter color default is the color of the selector when it is in its normal state neither selected nor active Counter color active is the highlight color for the selector of the active row a field in the row is active 4 263 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 7 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development Counter color selected is the color of the border of the selected row which has been selected by clicking on the selector Importing and exporting stylesheets Stylesheets are imported and exported with the Import stylesheet and Export stylesheet menu items When selected an Open file importing or Save file exporting dialog displays allowing you to specify the file name 4 264 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development Form and security settings Introduction The last step before the form can be finalized and published is the configuration of the form and security settings These settings concern various aspects for
162. d the selection value return value The list value is displayed when the list is shown and the selection value is displayed in the list field after it has been selected This is also the value which can be used in further calculations If no selection value has been defined the list value is used instead Selection lists can also be assembled using expressions Selection lists are implemented as Combo box fields Combo box fields offer a selection from a static or dynamically created list of options The Combo box tool amp creates a field which allows to chose from a list of options After selecting the tool a cursor with a Combo box field in default size appears see Fig 4 94 Assigned to the Combo box tool is a combo box 96 pt wide and 12 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Li and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first combo box placed in a form has therefore the name Li000 In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 95 the first combo box field of the form has been placed and then selected 4 117 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 95 Newly created z Snapform Designer New form com bo box fi eld File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help z e OO e Beraam x Properties of Combo box Property Value Name i000 Category stylesheet
163. d via a rule specified in the Validation dialog see section 4 8 4 3 When this box is checked the form can be printed even if it is not filled out with valid information The validity is controlled via a rule specified in the Checking dialog see section 4 8 4 2 When this box is checked data can only be imported when it is compatible with the form When this box is checked the form can be digitally signed with appropriate systems When this box is checked the form can be filed electronically using the eFiling mechanism defined in the eFiling dialog see section 4 8 8 The next two options are only active when this box is checked When this box is checked the form can be filed electronically even if it is not completely filled out The completeness is defined in the rule defined in the Validation dialog see section 4 8 4 3 This check box is only available when the Allow eFiling box is checked When this box is checked the form can be filed electronically even if it is not filled out with valid information The validity is defined in the rule defined in the Validation dialog see section 4 8 4 2 This check box is only available when the Allow eFiling box is checked 4 271 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 3 3 Clear entries Save Save as Import data Chapter 4 Forms Development Action keys One of the features of Snapform is that action buttons are moved out of the form to the application In mo
164. d via entry fields Snapform uses text fields in their widest sense option fields and check boxes as well as lists to acquire data Text fields are separated into specialized field types such as Date or Entry masks The following sections describe first the common features of text fields and then the specifics of the different special purpose fields Entry fields in general Entry fields are placed on the workspace after selecting the according tool They are added to the document structure and inserted into the taborder The properties shown in Fig 4 47 and explained below are the same for all entry fields except some properties which are not available for Password fields Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 47 Properties of entry fields shown wit a Text field Name Category Stylesheet Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Text Field Property Value Name TxO00 Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder 10 Printable visible Required Value Locked Left 63 4785 Top 40 7609 Width 96 00 Height 12 00 Read only Single use Field Tooltip text Horizontal alignment Length Configure boxing Link to object Only digits O OBIE The name of the entry field in the document This name can be changed Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clic
165. d which allows displaying and entering of structured strings After selecting the tool a cursor with a Masked input field element in default size appears see Fig 4 71 E Assigned to the Masked input field tool is a masked input field 96 pt wide and 12 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 72 Newly created masked input field Chapter 4 Forms Development automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Mk and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first masked input field placed in a form has therefore the name mkooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 72 the first masked input field of the form has been placed and then selected amp Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help 008a a A o An Baa amaj Property Value Name mkooo Category Styleshest Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 46 4674 Top 48 913 Width 96 00 Height 12 00 Read only Single use field Tooltip text Horizontal alignment Mask Placeholder Only complete values Configure boxing Link to object Controls Tools Find amp replace Form Page 1 L ve E a 3 ag al a E 2 a 28 a g x EEEE
166. d x is greater than or equal to the operand y the result is TRUE if it is smaller it is FALSE Note When operands of the string type are compared the result is always FALSE x gt y Comparison x and y numeric Compares the two operands and returns the result If the operand x is greater than the operand y the result is TRUE if it is smaller or equal it is FALSE Note When operands of the string type are compared the result is always FALSE X lt y Comparison x and y numeric Compares the two operands and returns the result If the operand x is smaller than or equal to the operand y the result is TRUE if it is greater it is FALSE Note When operands of the string type are compared the result is always FALSE Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 2 12 Type Type of operands Description 5 2 13 Type Type of operands Description 5 2 14 Type Type of operands Chapter 5 Expression language reference X lt y Comparison x and y numeric Compares the two operands and returns the result If the operand x is smaller than the operand y the result is TRUE if it is greater or equal it is FALSE Note When operands of the string type are compared the result is always FALSE x AND y Logical x and y boolean Logical AND Compares the operands and returns the result If both operands are TRUE the result is TRUE if one or both operands are FALSE the result is FALSE The opera
167. de Format 16x48 Encoding TEXT Bcd006 Datamatrix barcode Format 16x48 Encoding ASCII NON BWN gt All seven barcodes represent the text specified in the entry field according to the specific properties In the example file the text can be changed and the symbols change accordingly Item 7 should display a rectangular symbol but the selected encoding creates more characters than allowed Therefore a square symbol is created When the entered text is changed to Datamatrix is a 2 D Matrix symbology the rectangular symbol appears QRCode The QRCode barcode is a high density square matrix symbology The data capacity is 7089 numeric characters 4296 alphanumeric characters 1817 Kanji characters or 2953 Bytes worth of binary data maximum symbol size lowest error correction level The QRCode has been designed for applications in Japan The symbol contains a typical finder pattern a larger symbol in the top left top right and bottom left corner plus a smaller one near the bottom right corner which allows omnidirectional reading The symbol can contain one of 40 pre defined sizes and several error correction levels are provided Besides characters with a decimal code between 0 and 255 Kanji characters are also supported Hex values 8140 9FFC and E040 EBBF The QRCode barcode tool creates a field which allows displaying a QRCode 2D barcode After selecting the tool a cursor with a 2D barcode field in default size
168. ded with a two or five digit supplemental code The former is used for periodicals to encode the issue month week etc and the latter is used to indicate the recommended minimum retail price These supplemental codes are numeric as well These two codes are the so called small retail business codes With small packaging it may be difficult to place a complete UPC A or EAN 13 code For this reason a similarly structured smaller code has been developed The UPC E code is a reduced to 6 digits version of the 10 digits of the UPC A code Note As the UPC E code is a reduced version of the UPC A code a valid and reducable 12 digit UPC A number must be entered as value 4 141 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Code 128 and EAN 128 Chapter 4 Forms Development The EAN 8 code is an independent number which is centrally registered Valid characters 0123456789 Application retail business Similar to the EAN 13 and UPC A code the EAN 8 and UPC E code can be extended with a two or five digit supplement see above These two codes are technically identical The Code 128 is a high density alphanumeric code Code 128 is a continuous symbology with variable length The code contains a check sum modulo 103 which is calculated automatically and not displayed The EAN 128 also called UCC 128 is technically spoken Code 128 but consists of logical blocks containing relevant information for the logistics such as
169. des EAN 8 EAN 13 UPC A UPC E Note The Draft mode view is identical to Fig 4 105 Fig 4 108 Examples from ean_family qdf Snapform Viewer ean_family gdf in DASA 808 in the Snapform 6 Viewer gL UA iil 1M 234561 2 DEE 123456789012 M iil 789012 ESKE 5678 0123456780012 0123456789012 12345678 0123456789012 12345678 890123 6 76 al 1234567 234567 890128 ale che 89012 12345 lt isi 1 Bc000 UPC A Code text 123456789012 with check digit 2 Bc002 EAN 13 Code text 0123456789012 with check digit 3 BcO001 UPC E Code text 123456789012 with check digit the reduction of the number of digits occurs automatically Bc003 EAN 8 Code text 12345678 with check digit 5 Bc004 EAN 13 Code text 0123456789012 with check digit without guard bars 6 BcO006 EAN 13 Code text 123456789012 with check digit with 2 digit supplement code 76 7 Bc005 EAN 8 Code text 123 45678 with check digit without guard bars 8 Bc007 EAN 13 Code text 123 4567890123 with check digit with 5 digit supplement code 12345 4 147 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 109 Examples from etc_family gdfin the Snapform Viewer Chapter 4 Forms Deve
170. domString leng th digits getPrintidStr length digits 4 5 2 9 setList ComboBox str_items str_values getSelectedindex Com boBox setSelectedindex Com boBox index Chapter 4 Forms Development Creates an unique identification string GUID Global Unique Identifier which can be linked to a print job Example see func_ident gdf Creates an unique identification string GUID Global Unique Identifier which can be linked to a set of forms data Example see func_ident qdf Creates a randomly assembled string of the length length Example see func_ident qdf Creates a freely configurable identifier string which can be linked to a print job Example see func_ident qdf Combo box functions Combo box functions are used to manage and configure combo box form elements The following functions are part of the group of combo box functions Configures the selection list for the list field ComboBox Example see func_combobox qadf Returns the index number of the current selection of a List field Example see func_combobox qadf Sets the current selection of the List field ComboBox to the value associated to index index Example see func_combobox qadf 4 255 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 5 2 10 Compress x if logical_test value_if_true value_if_false isEmpty x importData url getVersion getContent url Chapter 4 Forms Development Special functions Special fu
171. dths Intercharacter separator 1 narrow unit width these parameters are the default settings of the Snapform Designer Bc004 Code 39 text 1234567 with check digit Unit width 0 04 cm Height 1 cm Wide unit width 3 narrow unit widths Intercharacter separator 5 narrow unit widths Bc006 Code 39 text 1234567 with check digit same as item 1 but without text Bc001 Code 93 text 1234567 with check digit Rotation angle 0 Bc003 Code 93 text 1234567 with check digit Rotation angle 180 Bc005 Code 93 text 1234567 with check digit Rotation angle 90 Bc007 Code 93 text 1234567 with check digit Rotation angle 270 4 150 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 6 4 4 6 1 Chapter 4 Forms Development 2D Barcodes 2D barcodes are barcode symbologies which encode information not only in one dimension but in two This increases the capacity of the symbol dramatically compared to 1D barcodes up to 2400 bytes of binary data per symbol which with according compression can translate to up to 4000 characters This allows you to encode the entire data content of a form into a small area and it also allows you to build electronic workflows with paper based processes In addition there are barcode systems which allow you to chain symbols to increase the encodable amount of data For the choice of the barcode system the circumstances of the actual application must be taken into account even more than for 1D barcodes A
172. e important when working with forms Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 3 19 The Tools Menu Check form Function editor Stylesheet editor Import stylesheets Export stylesheets Form settings 3 2 2 9 Fig 3 20 The Help Menu Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer he Check form F fx Function editor B Stylesheet editor Import stylesheet Export stylesheet ly Form settings Checks the form for inconsistencies and incorrect expression syntax and generates an error report see Section 4 6 Opens the Function editor The Function editor is explained in section 4 5 1 2 Opens the Stylesheet editor The Stylesheet editor is explained in section 47 1 Opens an Open file dialog to select a form file qdf or a stylesheet file qdl from which the stylesheets will be imported see section 4 7 2 Opens a Save file dialog and exports the stylesheets of the active document into a stylesheet file qdl see section 4 7 2 Opens the Form settings window see section 4 8 to set various form and security options for the active form The Help Menu The Help menu see Fig 3 20 contains functions about using the Snapform Designer EA amp Online support Bs Enter license key Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Online support Enter license key About Snapform Designer Windows only 3 2 3 Fig 3 21 The Toolbar ANY Tear off bar New Form
173. e there may be problems in printouts In order to represent control characters which cannot be entered via keyboard the Tilde character is used This property specifies whether the Tilde character is regarded as a control character When this box is checked the Tilde character is interpreted as a control character This has the following implications which must be taken into consideration when the encoding data stream is calculated e is replaced with the actual tilde character therefore double the Tilde character if one must get into the data stream e dxxx ls replaced with the character whose ASCII code is xxx which means that for example d065 will be replaced with A This representation is important when control characters in the lowest ASCII range are encoded e 1 will be replaced with the FNC1 character This is a special character which can be at the very beginning of a Datamatrix 4 181 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development barcode datastream and has the meaning that the data is conforming to the UCC EAN Standard Identifier Format This character can only be placed at the first position of the datastream e 3 is a special character which can be at the very beginning of a Datamatrix barcode datastream and has the meaning that the data contains control functions for the reading unit e Exxxxxx is replaced with the so called Extended Interpretation Channel flag with number xxxx
174. e also becomes the current page The menu item Edit gt Insert new page is similar but inserts the new page before the current page The new page also becomes the current page Pages are removed with the menu item Edit gt Delete this page This command deletes the current page Attention This command deletes the current page without further warning and without the possibility of undoing Note After the current page has been deleted the first page of the document becomes the current page Page properties The page properties are displayed in the Properties window see Fig 4 18 as long as no element of the page is selected Page properties are normally valid for the current page but they may also be valid for the whole form see descriptions Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 18 The Page Properties window Form name Print back color Allow duplicate names Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Form page Property Form name Print back color Allow duplicate names Validation rule Page width Page height Paper size 50 45 Orientation Portrait Companion page Visible Printable Background image The first three properties are valid for the whole form the others are limited to the current page Allows you to apply a name to the form This name is used as an internal reference When this option is checked the background color is printed as well When it is not checked no ba
175. e called Snapform Designer EN About Snapform Selecting this menu item opens an information window about the Designer Macintosh Snapform Designer only The menu item About Snapform Designer shows the current version information as well as the license information see Fig 3 6 Note Under Windows this menu item is located in the Help menu Fig 3 6 The About R e098 About Snapform Designer i About Snapform Designer window You can click on the tabs below to see information S about Snapform Designer s version and the system s state e e System information Snapform Designer 5 1 10 Copyright 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG www snapforms com This copy is licensed to Product level Enterprise version CHelp_ Close The System information display shows an overview over the system environment relevant to the Snapform Designer see Fig 3 7 This information can be useful for debugging purposes Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 3 User Manual Using the Snapform Designer Fig 3 7 The About System 3 e098 About information About Snapform Designer window You can click on the tabs below to see information about Snapform Designer s version and the system s state x f Snapform Designer Property Value apple awt graphics UseQuartz true apple laf useScreenMenuBar true application fullversion 5 1 10 AS application name Snapform Designe application vendor Ringler Informatik appl
176. e height is automatically adjusted to the width in order to create a square field Otherwise the Width value is not changed 4 178 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Height Transparent Back color Barcode color Rotation angle Encoding Chapter 4 Forms Development Height of the bounding box of the Datamatrix barcode field If its value is smaller the width is automatically adjusted to the height in order to create a square field Otherwise the Height value is not changed The background of the Datamatrix barcode is set to transparent no covering background color with this check box This property is unchecked by default Background color of the Datamatrix barcode field By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows you to specify the color The background color is only applied when the Transparent check box is unchecked Color of the barcode By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color Note Standards for the Datamatrix barcode may contain requirements concerning the colors to be used and should be referred to Also note that only the full colors Black Cyan Magenta and Yellow are printed as full color unless specific spot colors are used and that good printing quality can be achieved only with these colors at 100 saturation as there will not be screened modules The barcode can be rotated by
177. e other hand an expression language is easier to learn and expressions can be created using code generators which simplifies its use even more Another difference is that with expressions field related results are oulled in whereas in programming languages field related results also can be pushed into a field The consequence is that for expression languages the expression must be directly assigned to the field which will show the result The expression editor with its user interface is explained in section 3 2 8 Expressions are processed either from a user action the user does something or from logic the form does something Carriers of action and logic Actions and logic need a carrier so that they can be executed In Snapform such carriers are fields and functions In older Snapform versions expressions could only be assigned to labels This is no longer the case expressions can now be attached to any field type It is also possible to define expressions as functions which has the advantage that the code can be repurposed 4 243 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 5 1 1 4 5 1 2 Fig 4 166 The function editor Chapter 4 Forms Development Fields Expressions in fields are self referring The result is either completely independent from fields such as showing or hiding pages or it is written directly into the associated field Expressions are specified in the Value property
178. e selected It contains three submenus The active selected element with the full black markers on its bounding box is the reference element This submenu see Fig 3 14 aligns the selected elements in relationship to each other The alignment occurs according to the respective bounding box of the selected elements Format Controls view Tools Help Co R Make same size gt 3 Centers S p Spacing S Rights ree agi Tops Jo 2 4 eo so tL Middes T n al Bottoms The upper three items control the horizontal alignment and the lower three items control the vertical alignment The elements are aligned horizontally to their left borders The elements are aligned horizontally to their centers The elements are aligned horizontally to their right borders The elements are aligned vertically to their top borders The elements are aligned vertically to their centers The elements are aligned vertically to their bottom borders Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Submenu Make same size Fig 3 15 The menu Format gt Make same size Same width Same height Same size Submenu Spacing Fig 3 16 The Format gt Spacing menu Equal vertical spacing Equal horizontal spacing Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer This submenu see Fig 3 15 adjusts the size of the selected elements in relationship to each other The alignment occurs according to the respective bounding box of the selected elements
179. e the documentation for the API Data binary qdd Format of the binary data export and import file used by the Snapform Viewer Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Format description 6 8 File extension Explanation Format description 6 9 Chapter 6 Snapform File Formats This format is compressed and encrypted and is extremely compact It requires specific tools to read and write data Pure binary format Data can be read only via API for a format description see the documentation for the API Data open xml Format of the open data export and import file used by the Snapform Viewer This format is open and can be treated like any normal XML file To read and write data standard tools can be used This format is a subset of the QDF A format and uses only the Data element of the Snapform Schema see section 6 2 The Snapform Schema The Snapform Schema is published at http www snapform com open_format snapform xsd The Schema is displayed below It is recommended that you download the file and open it in an appropriate XML editor XMLSpy oXygen There will be no further discussion of the Schema lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt edited with XMLSPY v5 rel 4 U http www xmlspy com by Ringler Informatik AG gt lt xs schema xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema elementFormDefault qualified gt lt xs element name id gt lt xs element name value gt lt
180. e true false field_name setFieldVisible true false field_name see func_status qdf setList ComboBox str_items str_ values Special functions Configures the selection list for the list field ComboBox Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference ComboBox Name of a selection list field str_items String with the list of the elements for the list field enclosed with double quotes and separated with str_values String with the list of the return values for the list field enclosed with double quotes and separated with The list of selections gets configured This function is used to configure the selection list for the List field ComboBox Applying this function corresponds to filling out the table in the configuration window of the selection list see section 4 4 4 Fig 4 99 In the str_items string the entries of the left hand column Elements of the table are defined The elements are separated with the character In the str_values string the entries of the right hand column values of the table are defined The elements are separated with the character When this string is missing or empty no return values are defined for the selection list and the List field returns the element names It is important to make sure that the individual elements in str_items and in str_values correspond to each other
181. eaning The encoding occurs bytewise In order to enable this encoding method the data stream must be available as a byte sequence This can be done using the functions getByte string and Compress x The encoding occurs only for the numbers 0 9 4 190 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Alphanumeric Kanji Correction level Version Autoconfigurate Chapter 4 Forms Development The encoding occurs only for the numbers 0 9 upper case letters A Z and 9 special characters lt Space gt The encoding occurs only for Japanese characters Kanji including Hiragana and Katakana with Hex code 8140 9FFC and E040 EBBF In this range numbers upper case letters and certain special characters are also contained When the data stream contains unencodeable characters the QRCode barcode field will be displayed as a grey area The QRCode barcode has several error correction levels The lowest level allows the loss of about 7 of the symbol the highest level about 30 When this property is selected a drop down menu opens with the options L M Q and H Default value is L In the QRCode barcode terminology the term Version stands for the size of the symbol 40 sizes are defined which may be available for the encoding When this property is selected a drop down menu opens with the options corresponding to the 40 different sizes values between 1 and 40 Default value is 1 When the property Autoc
182. eckbox in the Properties dialog of the according field setFieldVisible true false field_name setFieldWritable true false field_name see func_status qdf setFieldVisible true false field_name Status function Sets the visible property of the field true false status value true or false field_name field name Field property is set Sets the visible property of the field field_name to true or false This corresponds to the checking or unchecking of the visible checkbox in the Properties dialog of the according field setFieldPrintable true false field_name setFieldWritable true false field_name see func_status qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 62 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 63 Category Short description Chapter 5 Expression language reference setFieldWritable true false field_name Status function Controls the read only property of the field true false Status value true or false field_name field name Field property is set Sets the read only property of the field field_name to true or false This corresponds to the unchecking or checking of the read only checkbox in the Properties dialog of the according field This function acts inverse to the checking and unchecking of the read only checkbox In order to check this box the status false must be set in this function and vice versa setFieldPrintabl
183. ed 1 square 10x10 12x12 14x14 16x16 18x18 20x20 22x22 24x24 26x26 32x32 36x36 40x40 44x44 48x48 52x52 64x64 72x72 80x80 88x88 96x96 104x104 120x120 132x132 144x144 2 rectangular 8x18 8x32 12x26 12x36 16x36 16x48 When this property is selected a drop down menu opens with the options AUTO followed by the list of the above mentioned dimensions AUTO is the default 4 180 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Module size Process tilde Chapter 4 Forms Development The option AUTO means that based on the encoded data the best possible symbol size is selected The symbol is anchored to the upper left corner of the barcode field and therefore its bottom right corner moves when the symbol grows Note Even when a fixed dimension is selected the next larger size is used when the amount of data exceeds the maximum for the size It is therefore important to estimate the amount of data to be encoded and to reserve sufficient white space around the symbol Note The rectangular symbols have as it shows in the list a small data capacity The biggest rectangular symbol 16x48 can at most encode 72 alphanumeric characters or 47 Byte worth of binary data When this amount of data is exceeded a suitable square format is used This is the size of a module the smallest unit of the Datamatrix barcode Measuring unit is Point and the default value is 2 This value should not be much smaller as otherwis
184. ed 4 222 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development In order to mark and as a reminder to configure a newly placed hyperlink has the text Hyperlink which covers the field name Fig 4 151 Newly created Snapform Designer New form hyper link Fie Edt Format Controls View Tools Help 010848 CATE JELE E O T a Q Draft Preview ots Hooo Category Stylesheet Default 10 Hyperlink 37 9213 28 6517 60 00 13 00 Horizontal alignment Left Rotation angle oe Transparent Draw underline URL Link to object Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form Page 1 HEeHBHBOMBHBEHEBe SHED 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the hyperlink can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the hyperlink are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 152 4 223 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 152 Properties of a hyperlink Name Category Stylesheet Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Hyperlink Prope
185. ed in section 4 7 Note Stylesheets must be carefully planned With well thought out stylesheets the work for further forms can be considerably reduced and they also ensure a common look and feel Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 1 1 4 3 1 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development Base layout The first step of the development of a new form is the creation of the base layout The base layout can either be imported as a background image and would be non editable in the Snapform Designer or it can be part of the form and be fully editable in the Snapform Designer Mixed variants are of course always possible In many cases a print version of the form already exists very often in the PDF format In such a case the PDF document can be converted into a background image This method has the advantage that the Snapform form will look identical to the print version including micro typographical finesses and already existing material does not need to be recreated If there is no existing version the base layout can be developed in the Snapform Designer beginning with an empty page Background images For background images the hdt format is used Background images are created by converting a PDF document For this conversions two possibilities are available 1 The Snapform PDF Converter 2 The free conversion service provided by Ringler Informatik AG Snapform PDF Converter The Snapform PDF Conver
186. ed out Helpful Hint Entering text in HTML form into the expression editor can sometimes be rather tedious It is therefore recommended to use an external text editor which supports HTML formatting in a more suitable way An additional help for text entry is provided by utilities such as Markdown which use a simplified syntax for creating formatted text and then convert it in the text editor to HTML code Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 6 1 Chapter 4 Forms Development The Label tool The Labeltool creates afield for displaying text After selecting the tool a cursor with a text frame in default size appears see Fig 4 40 Fig 4 40 Label tool cursor Assigned to the Label tool is a rectangle 60 pt wide and 13 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Lb and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first label placed in a form has therefore the name Lboo0 In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 41 the first label of the form has been placed and then selected Fig 4 41 Newly created n Snapform Designer New form label File Edt Format Controls View Tools Help 208a a A O ein aBa amalla x ae LJ m G g Property Value Name Lb000 O 29 40 80 80 100 120 140 180 0 e A 380 400 Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Preview Jo op Tre Pn a W
187. educe breaks in workflows and allow at the same time the intergration with existing legacy business applications e Support for a wide range of text entry methods including Chinese Japanese Korean Hebrew and Arabic allows world wide use of the forms e The user interface of the Snapform Viewer is available in more than 32 languages and thus supports general public users with ease The licensing model of Snapform contains an unrestricted and free of charge use of Snapform forms The form user does not encounter limitations which can only be overcome or enabled with additional software or services A more in depth description of the QDF file format as far as it has been disclosed outside of special developments can be found in chapter 6 QDF can be formatted either compressed encrypted or as an open XML format QDF S QDF S is the most thoroughly protected and most compact variant of ODF All components are compressed and encrypted 128 bit and can only be opened with the Snapform Viewer and properly equipped server applications Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 1 4 3 Chapter 1 Introduction QDF A QDF A is the standard version of QDF where the data layer is disclosed in XML format This allows archival or document management software to access and manage filled out Snapform forms without the need for additional tools Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 2 2 1 Platform Other Hardware Chapter 2
188. een placed and then selected Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 61 Newly created numeric field Chapter 4 Forms Development Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help jajoaad m Oo A BBR wale s e 4 lt E Q Draft Preview Property valse Name Nrooo Ee 2 a o s too 120 140 io 180 200 220 240 260 a80 300 320 340 300 380 400 fff Category 1 1 1 L 1 L 1 1 L 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 L A Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Single use field Tooltip text Horizontal alignment Right Lenat o Leading zeros Rounding No rounding Always negative Minimum value Maximum value Configure boxing Linkto object II Toots Controls Tools Find amp replace Form a ES Jz S a le E i a g E B a l m T BEEE lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the numeric field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the numeric field are controlled in the Prope
189. eight Same size Drop down icon Spacing Equal vertical spacing Equal horizontal spacing Function editor Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer The elements are aligned vertically to their centers The elements are aligned vertically to their bottom borders This drop down menu opens the same submenu as the Format gt Make same size submenu see Fig 3 15 The dimensions of the selected form elements are adjusted The adjustments are made to the bounding box of the respective form elements All selected elements get the same width as the reference element All selected elements get the same height as the reference element All selected elements get the same width and height as the reference element This drop down icon opens the same submenu as the Format gt Spacing menu see Fig 3 16 The distance between the selected elements are adjusted The adjustment occurs on the vertical or horizontal center axis of the bounding box of the respective element In order for this button to be available at least three elements must be selected The vertical spacing between the horizontal center lines of the selected elements are changed to be equal The horizontal spacing between the vertical center lines of the selected elements are changed to be equal Opens the Function editor The Function editor is explained in section 3 2 8 and section 4 5 1 2 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Stylesheet editor
190. elimiter value value2 vi Table of contents 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 23 23 24 25 25 26 27 27 28 29 30 30 31 32 32 33 34 34 35 35 36 37 37 38 39 39 40 41 SnapForm Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 43 5 3 44 5 3 45 5 3 46 5 3 47 5 3 48 5 3 49 5 3 50 5 3 51 5 3 52 5 3 53 5 3 54 5 3 55 5 3 56 5 3 57 5 3 58 5 3 59 5 3 60 5 3 61 5 3 62 5 3 63 5 3 64 5 3 65 5 3 66 5 3 67 5 3 68 5 3 69 5 3 70 5 3 71 5 3 72 5 3 73 5 3 74 5 3 75 5 3 76 5 3 77 5 3 78 5 3 79 Table of contents getVersion getYear date_value if logical_ test value_if_true value_if_false importData url IncVersion initial_ value step InStr string pattern start_position isEmpty x Left string count Len x Log x match string regex Max x y Min x y Now replaceAll orig_ string regex replace_with Right string count Round x setFieldPrintable true false field_name setFieldVisible true false field_name setFieldWritable true false field_name setList ComboBox str_items str_ values setPagePrintable true false page_number page_number setPageVisible true false page_number page_number setPrintable category_list true false setSelectedIndex ComboBox index setVisible category_list true false setWritable category_list true false Sin x Sqrt x Str x StrTotal table column SubArray byte_array start
191. ements in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the text Editor i x Draft Preview 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 480 480 500 520 540 54 aS Data entry fields lt 4 C Oe o 160 n gt Se Ces 240 Bia O i aaae ka 0 1 CEECEE Bes Se Sel ie 4 101 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 83 Filledoutexamples of Entry fields of entryfields qdf in the Snapform Viewer DR 159 Bs N i NOOB WN Chapter 4 Forms Development eingabefelder qdf Snapform Viewer S Data entry fields 1 Base value 2E nti gy value 3 A multiline field with several entered values and lines like this 4 4 352 342 345 55 5 45 55 6 00004532 if 34232 22 8 2323244 9 13 04 2007 1024 12 2006 4112 12 2004 12 434 34 6432 13 124 ADF 25 14 041 766 40 40 Tx000 Simple text field with default value Tx001 Boxed text field MIO00 Multiline text field Nr001 Numeric field no rounding no format Nr002 Numeric field value between 10 and 150 rounding to 05 Nr003 Numeric field with leading zeros 8 digits Nr004 Boxed numeric field with separated decimal sign and rounding to 001 Nr005 Boxed numeric field with Digits and sign length 8 digits and rounding to 01 Dt000 Simple date field format dd MM
192. en selected required fields will display an icon representing an exclamation mark When the option Use background colors to mark status of required fields has been selected three additional color selectors appear Empty fields sets the color of the field when it is empty Entered field shows the color when the field has been filled and Highlighted empty fields shows the color for an empty field which has the focus amp Stylesheet editor List of stylesheets Properties 1 Default 8 General settings Input controls amp labels Infopoint and hyperlinks Tables 2 Default 9 3 Default 10 default Infopoint title eaigond cor I acho Text color a Alpha Infopoint panel Background color va Alpha 13 Default 12 Bold Tet aia E i ae 14 Default 14 Bold 15 Default 16 Bold Hyperlink a epe NE Background color Alpha 18 Default 9 Italic 19 Default 10 Italic Heese td E C 262 20 Default 11 Italic 21 Default 12 Italic Actwecolor M 22 Default 14 Italic 23 Default 16 Italic 24 Default 18 Italic new clone _ __ Delete In the Infopoints and hyperlinks settings the background and text color for various states of infopoints and hyperlinks is controlled Background color is the color of the background of the element if it has not been overridden in the Back color property Text color is the color of the text if it has not been overridden in the properties of the element 4 262
193. ength of at least count characters When string is shorter the empty value is returned Left string count SubStr string start count and other string functions see func_string 1 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 99 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 60 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference Round x Math function Rounds the entered value up or down to the next whole number x numeric any value numeric Rounds the entered value up or down to the closest whole number When the values after the decimal sign of x is smaller than x 5 it gets rounded down when it is greater than or equal to x 5 it gets rounded up If the rounding should occur to the value precision precision Round x precision is used Ceil x Floor x see func_math1 qdf setFieldPrintable true false field_name Status function Sets the printable property of the field true false status value true or false field_name field name Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 61 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference Field property is set Sets the printable property of the field field_name to true or false This corresponds to the checking or unchecking of the printable ch
194. ension opose name when saving form in SF Viewer optional Printing Fit page to printer margins File format Secure QDF 5 compact binary Format Open QDF A open XML format Document information The document information is about the document itself and its components can for example be used to identify it in forms or document management systems The Form ID is a unique identifier in the GUID format which provides a definite identification of the document worldwide This value is created with the creation of the document and remains saved with it Clicking on New allows you to create another Form ID A dialog asks whether the ID should be changed and when confirmed the change is executed In this text field the version of the document can be entered This value appears in the metadata of the file information URL of the issuer of the form This URL may be used for providing updates to the form or to allow contact with the issuer or its technical support E Mail address of the issuer of the form This address can for example be used for contacting the issuer or their support department 4 266 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 2 2 Save Form as a template Propose name when saving form in SF Viewer 4 8 2 3 Fit page to printer margins Chapter 4 Forms Development Templates The form can be saved as a template This always resets the form when
195. ension determines directly the absolute height of the resulting code When its value is 0 the height of the symbol is controlled with the Bar height ratio property which sets it in relationship with the symbol width Helpful Hint 7o calculate the approximate size in Points multiply this value by 200 and then reduce it by 10 1D barcodes have narrow and wide unit bars This property of the barcode is the ratio of the widths of the wide and the narrow unit bar This value influences the length of the resulting symbol Typical values are 2 and 3 whereas for many barcode symbologies 3 is required in the standard 3 is preferable when the unit width is small This can improve the readability of the code For some barcode systems primarily the ones with a fixed data length the proportions of the symbol are specified in the standard This property calculates the height of the bars from the width of the symbol The barcode can be rotated by multiples of 90 Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu with the selection of the rotation angles 0 90 180 270 The default value is 0 Note The direction in which the barcode grows is the same as the rotation angle When this box is checked the contents of the barcode is also displayed as text Self checking characters are shown but auxiliary characters such as Start and Stop characters are not shown All characters relevant 4 134 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual
196. ent format is called QDF Quick Document Format and is based on XML QDF consists essentially of the following five components e A reduced set of SVG to display background layouts and graphics e Amechanism for embedding and replacing fonts e An object layer with vector based data entry components e A data layer representing data in a structured manner e A structured storing system to bundle these elements and attachments into one single file where data can be optionally compressed The sum of these five components leads to important advantages e QDF documents are logically preformatted and therefore extremely compact in size e Form Fields and business logic are also very compact and increase the documents size only by a small percentage e The SVG based background layer of the form provides printing formats in vector quality and also guarantees a complete representation of transparency e The font replacement strategy of Snapform allows a platform independent original representation of fonts even if the particular font is not installed on the user s computer Other features of QDF Snapform Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 1 4 2 Chapter 1 Introduction e The precise representation of a paper based form layout on screen and when printed permits the use of this technology in document based workflows where both data and their presentation are important e Support for all current barcode symbologies 1D and 2D r
197. ents A help system 240 4 5 Actions and logic 243 4 5 1 Carriers of action and logic 243 4 5 1 1 Fields 244 4 5 1 2 Functions 244 4 5 2 Actions and logic available in Snapform 245 4 5 2 1 String functions 245 4 5 2 2 Regular Expression functions 246 4 5 2 3 Math functions 247 4 5 2 4 Table functions 249 4 5 2 5 Date functions 250 4 5 2 6 State functions 252 4 5 2 7 Consistency check functions 253 4 5 2 8 Identifier functions 254 4 5 2 9 Combo box functions 255 4 5 2 10 Special functions 256 4 6 Integrity of the form 257 4 7 Stylesheets 258 4 7 1 The Stylesheet editor 258 4 7 2 Importing and exporting stylesheets 264 4 8 Form and security settings 265 4 8 1 Introduction 265 4 8 2 General 265 4 8 2 1 Document information 266 4 8 2 2 Templates 267 4 8 2 3 Printing 267 4 8 2 4 File format 268 4 8 3 Security 268 4 8 3 1 Passwords 269 4 8 3 2 Options 270 4 8 3 3 Action keys 272 SnapForm Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 4 4 8 4 1 4 8 4 2 4 8 4 3 4 8 5 4 8 6 4 8 7 4 8 8 4 8 8 1 4 8 8 2 4 8 8 3 4 8 8 4 4 9 4 10 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 5 2 6 5 2 7 5 2 8 5 2 9 5 2 10 5 2 11 5 2 12 5 2 13 5 2 14 5 2 15 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 Validation Form expiry Invalid form Incomplete form RDF Metadata Server side interaction Fonts eFiling Format File name Target UI settings Release and deployment Forms management Expression language reference Constants TRUE FALSE
198. er column column getValues delimiter value1 value2 getRow getCol 4 5 2 5 Today Chapter 4 Forms Development Adds the values of the column column to a time Example see func_table2 qdf Represents the value of the table cell of table table column column row row Example see func_table2 qadf Creates a string with table values assembled row by row and specific delimiters Example see func_table1 qadf Assembles the values of the indicated fields to a string using the delimiter character delimiter Example see func_table2 qadf Shows the row number of the according field in the respective table Example see func_table2 qaf Shows the column number of the according field in the respective table Example see func_table2 qadf Date functions Date functions are applied to date and time as well as date time differences The following functions are part of the group of date functions Returns the current date Example see func_date qdf 4 250 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Now Date year month day Time hour minute second getDay date_value getMonth date_value getYear date_value getHour time_value getMinute time_value addDay date_value number Chapter 4 Forms Development Returns the current time Example see func_time qdf Creates a date object from the arguments Example see func_date qdf Creates a time object from t
199. er 5 x User Manual 4 3 4 1 Add new page Fig 4 17 Add page dialog Page size Orientation Actual size Use background color Chapter 4 Forms Development Adding and removing pages To add and remove pages three items are available in the Edit menu The menu item Edit gt Add new page opens the New page dialog see Fig 4 17 This dialog is very similar to the one to create a new page without background image Page size 150 44 Orientation Portrait Actual size 210 0 x 297 0 mm Use background color This drop down menu contains a comprehensive list of paper sizes from all over the world This drop down menu contains a list of the available page orientations see Fig 4 15 The options Reverse portrait and Reverse landscape are intended for places where both sides of the paper are going to be printed Dimensions of the selected paper size This field cannot be edited When this box is checked the background of the form will be in the color specified in the Color selection field Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Color Insert new page Deleting pages 4 3 4 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development When the check box Use background color is checked this field becomes active Double clicking this field or clicking on the button opens the color picking window see section 3 2 9 2 where the color can be specified Clicking on Create creates the page and adds it to the document The new pag
200. er interface of the Expression editor is explained in section 3 2 8 Remarks on how to insert expressions into the form can be found in section 4 5 These notes are logically valid for the Function editor whose user interface is identical to the Expression editor Constants are values which are used in expressions and have the same value all over the system The number Pl is a good example of a constant Operators are applied on one or two elements The result is returned and assigned to the target An example for an operator is the addition symbol Functions are applied to their arguments The result is returned and assigned to the target Function results can be connected using Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 5 User Manual Expression language reference operators or they can be arguments for other functions They are also a full replacement for Label fields which used to be the only carriers for expressions in earlier versions of Snapform Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 1 5 1 1 Type Description 5 1 2 Type Description 5 1 3 Type Description Chapter 5 Expression language reference Constants TRUE Boolean This is a Boolean constant and has the meaning of true the equivalent of it is so It appears as the result of a logical operator or as return value of a function Note This constant can also be written in lower case true FALSE Boolean This is a Boolean constant a
201. es which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Chapter 4 Forms Development The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For labels the zones Font settings and Supplemental font support in the General settings tab of the stylesheet editor are of importance Note These stylesheet definitions are in no context with Cascading Style Sheets in HTML and do not have any effect on the representation of text in HTML form Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence which is logical because the Label is not an active element When the box is checked the label will be printed When the box is checked the label is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated and cannot be changed The text to be displayed is entered in this property of the Label element Clicking on this property field opens the expression editor Unformatted text is entered directly without quotes or equal sign HTML code can also be entered directly If the text to be displayed is the result of a cal
202. ession language reference string string to be searched or field name pattern string which should be found start_position position in string string from which the search should start optional integer greater than or equal to 0 default value when it is not specified is O numeric integer greater than or equal to 0 1 if pattern is not contained in string Searches the string string for the string pattern and retuns the position at which pattern begins When a string is entered for pattern it must be placed between double quotes With start_position the position from which on the search should start This can be useful when the search for another occurrence of pattern than the first one is intended The position numbers are O based Therefore the position of the first character is 0 When pattern is not found the function returns 1 The search is precise which means that capitalization is taken into account This fact must be considered when assembling the expression Left string count Right string count SubStr string start count and the other string functions see func_string2 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 49 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 50 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference isEmpty x Special functions Tests whether the argument x is empty or null Xx F
203. eturns the number of the row in the table of the field calling the function This value can be used in subsequent calculations Calling this function only makes sense in connection with tables When the calling field is not part of a table the function returns the value 1 getCol Cell table column row see func_table2 qdf getSelectedindex ComboBox Special functions Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 41 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference Returns the index number of the current selection of a List field ComboBox Name of a selection list field numeric integer between 1 and the number of entries of the list field Returns the index number of the current selection of a list field Numbering starts with 1 setList ComboBox str_items str_values setSelectedindex ComboBox index see func_combobox qdf getSessionID Identifier function Creates an unique identification string GUID Global Unique Identifier which can be assigned to the current working session with Snapform Viewer This function has no arguments String Creates a structured string consisting of 36 randomly selected characters The algorithm used for this purpose ensures that this string is unique world wide compared with other strings created in the same way This identifier
204. evelopment Fig 4 163 nfopoint examples from infopoint qdf in Draft mode Infopoints Fig 4 164 Infopoint a infopoint qdf Snapform Viewer examples from Pare infopoint qdf in the Snapform Viewer E ae i A gt 2 i sH lt gt 0 4 238 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development p000 Infopoint unformatted text value of Info text details A simple Info text 1001 Infopoint unformatted text value of Info text details A simple multiline text Snapform Infos info snapform com http www snapform com 1p002 Infopoint HTML encoded text with in line tags value of Info text details lt html gt lt p gt A simple lt em gt HTML encoded lt em gt Help text lt br gt multiline with lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt italic lt i gt and lt br gt even lt i gt lt u gt italic underlined lt u gt lt i gt font lt p gt lt html gt lp003 Infopoint HTML encoded text various tags value of Info text details lt html gt Heading levels lt hl gt Heading H1 lt h1 gt lt h2 gt Heading H2 lt h2 gt lt h3 gt Heading H3 lt h3 gt lt h4 gt Heading H4 lt h4 gt lt h5 gt Heading H5 lt h5 gt lt h6 gt Heading H6 lt h6 gt lt hr align center size 2 gt lt center gt lt p gt A whole block lt br gt of text to be lt br gt centered lt p gt lt center gt lt html gt p004 Infopoint HTML encoded text
205. ext By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color The text in a label can be rotated by multiples of 90 Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu with the selection of the rotation angles 0 90 180 270 The default value is 0 The background of the label is set to transparent no covering background color with this check box This property is active by default It is possible to associate the label with a check box The label becomes clickable and an extension of the check box When the label is clicked the state of the check box changes Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu with the selection of all check boxes in the document Selecting the according field name sets the association Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 43 Label examples of labels 1 qdfin Draft mode Chapter 4 Forms Development The document abels1 qdf see Fig 4 43 Draft mode and Fig 4 44 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows various examples of labels with simple text The document abels2 qdf see Fig 4 45 Draft mode and Fig 4 46 displayed in the Snapform Viewer shows examples of labels with formatted HTML text After selecting the label in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the text Draft Preview
206. f C snapform_maual_examples pdf Target folder name Browse For Folder Select target folder for QDF background layer files Ea B My Documents iE 3 My Computer 3 My Network Places Recycle Bin Make New Folder In the first line Source files pdf the path of the source directory containing the PDF documents is specified Clicking the button opens a Select Directory dialog to specify the according directory In the same way the target directory is specified in the Target folder name line When both directories are selected start the conversion by clicking on the Start button All PDF documents found in the source directory will now be converted one after the other The progress is indicated with a progress bar The conversion for each document is also logged in the log window In addition to an entry for the document there is an entry for each page of the document and the number of converted path and text elements is shown see Fig 4 11 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 11 4 3 2 6 Progress of the batch conversion Chapter 4 Forms Development M PDF batch conversion to Snapform background layer files hdt Source files pdf j m Target folder name p cor x Done Document contains 614 path elements and 1600 text elements Start document C snapform_maual_examples f1120 dft pdf Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 Done Document contains 615 pathlements and 1615 text ele
207. f The first level should help the user understanding the subject matter required to fill out the form It is not the task of the first level to explain why a certain entry has to be done and what it means The information on the first level is usually also used by screen readers to guide the user This must be taken into account when creating help text In Snapform the first level is implemented in the Tooltip text see section 4 4 2 1 topical notes for groups of fields The second level of the help system explains logically matching areas of the form Here the meaning of the area is discussed This information is topical and helps the inexperienced user to understand the subject matter The second level should on the other hand not cover data entry specific issues that has been covered in the first level unless these entries are explained in a greater context In Snapform the second level is implemented in infopoints see section 4 4 8 2 extensive topical notes for the whole form 4 241 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development The third level of the help system contains more extensive topics covering the whole form This information is still stored within the document but its access is not as immediate Accessing this information does not need to occur directly but can be done using a main switch which shows and hides a help layer In Snapform the third level is implemented wi
208. ference Greedy multipliers X one or Zero times X Zero or any times X one or multiple times X exactly n times X at least n times X at least n but at most m times Non greedy multipliers X one or zero times X Zero or any times X one or multiple times X exactly n times X at least n times X at least n but at most m times Possessive multipliers X one or zero times X Zero or any times X one or multiple times X exactly n times X at least n times X at least n but at most m times Logical operators X followed by Y Either Xor Y X as a saved group Backward references Match of the n th saved group Helpful hint The backslash character is used to display protected expressions as shown in the table above as well as for displaying characters which otherwise would be considered to be contro characters such as the backslash character itself Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 6 6 1 File extension Explanation Format description 6 2 File extension Explanation Format description Chapter 6 Snapform File Formats Snapform File Formats Form compressed QDF S qdf Compact Snapform format The whole content is compressed and encrypted This format requires special tools to read the data including metadata Pure binary format Data can be read only via API for a format description see the documentation for the API Form open QDF A qdf Open Snapform format On
209. form element indicates it is really Snapform forms data lt id gt AF14A833 274C C57A 0237 015E0D8A3F54 lt id gt The id element is the form ID see Abschnitt 4 8 2 lt values gt The values element contains the actual field values element value lt value name contractor type 4 gt false lt value gt lt value name datel type 5 gt lt value gt lt value name date2 type 5 gt lt value gt lt value name form no type 3 gt lt value gt lt value name licensee type 4 gt false lt value gt lt value name mailstop type 3 gt lt value gt lt values gt lt snapform gt lt Data gt lt Form gt lt CDATA QLpoOTFBWSZTWREBGEQAA07 111111111111 N71AAAASKCgAAoFUAqm9 fW4vVbs 3p5e0OAAKAAjxMqp0dAo DHALAPr8xrPEfcjiG IZwcklbOMHyAwdKMAd10UGhvD204B60dUN6wwV1 AlsBg5EccH 4u5IpwoSAiAjCQA gt lt Form gt The Form element contains a blob with the encoded form definition which is interpreted by the Snapform Designer and the Snapform Viewer lt QDFA gt Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 6 3 File extension Explanation Format description 6 4 File extension Explanation Format description Chapter 6 Snapform File Formats Form Template compressed QDF S qdft Compact Snapform Template format The whole content is compressed and encrypted This format requires special tools to read the data including metadata The Template format forces the Snapform Vie
210. g field occurs in the clear and the passwords will be displayed in the clear after saving and reopening the document in the Snapform Designer The protection using passwords is effective to a certain degree If a more extensive access protection to the form is needed external means must be used Ringler Informatik AG provides support for the implementation of extended security mechanisms This password is requested when opening the form for regular use It allows you to control the access to the form itself Without providing the correct Viewer password the form cannot be opened in the Snapform Viewer This password is requested when opening the form in the Snapform Designer This allows you to control the access to the form and in 4 269 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 8 3 2 Allow to change Allow to print Allow to print values only Allow to save Allow to save as Allow XML export Allow XML import Allow saving to QDF S format Allow saving to QDF A format Chapter 4 Forms Development particular to its business logic Without providing the correct Designer password the form cannot be opened in the Snapform Designer Options In the Options area the various usage rights for the form are listed and they can be activated or deactivated individually These options are fully honored in the Snapform Viewer When this box is checked the form can be changed in the Snapform Designer When this box is
211. g on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color Note Standards for the PDF 417 barcode may contain requirements concerning the colors to be used and should be referred to Also note that only the full colors Black Cyan Magenta and Yellow are printed as full color unless specific spot colors are used and that good printing quality can be achieved only with these colors at 100 saturation as there will not be screened modules This check box determines whether the symbol is scaled to the size of the PDF 417 barcode field When the box is checked the symbol is scaled to fit into the field perimeter The value for the Module size property is in this case overridden When the box is unchecked the 4 168 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Unit width cm Unit height cm of columns Chapter 4 Forms Development symbol is displayed using the specified module size and it is centered in the field Attention When this property is active the symbol may be scaled down so far with greater amount of data that it cannot be printed out properly anymore and the resulting module size will be too small Note When this property is not active the symbol may grow beyond the field s size and cover other elements of the document This property controls the width of a module of the PDF 417 barcode It is entered in cm As the PDF 417 barcode allows rectangular modules as opposed to
212. ge field e Stretch content X unchecked and Stretch content Y checked The image is scaled proportionally so that it completely fits into the image field When it is proportionally taller than the image field the height is the same as of the image field e Both boxes checked The image is scaled in both directions that it fills out the image field The proportions of the image are changed Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Horizontal alignment Vertical alignment Allow input Fig 4 38 mage inserting cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development When the image is narrower than the image field this property defines how it is horizontally positioned within the field When the property field is clicked a drop down menu appears with the options left center right which places the image left aligned centered or right aligned within the image field Default is center When the image is shorter than the image field this property defines how it is vertically positioned within the field When the property field is clicked a drop down menu appears with the options top center bottom which places the image top aligned centered or bottom aligned within the image field Default is center When this box is checked the user can insert his own image into the field when filling out the form A typical application for this is inserting a passport picture in a personnel form Item 4 field Im005 in the sample document images gdf is suc
213. ges see Fig 4 5 The current page is checked C snapform_maual_examples f1120_4p pdf Hiei Batch conversion Help zoom in zoom out Original size Select 5 o 7 U S i Select page age ag E ee of calendar year 2006 or Internal Arrens Page 2 A Check if Page 3 Nama 1 Consolidate IRS attach F Page 4 2 Parsonal holding co Se amg m Otherwise Number street ar latiach Soh PHI Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 46 The Batch conversion menu of the Snapform PDF Converter Fig 4 7 The Help menu of the Snapform PDF Converter Fig 4 8 Page selection drop down menu Chapter 4 Forms Development Convert PDF to Snapform File view alae eee a zeae Convert PDF files The Batch conversion menu see Fig 4 6 contains only menu item Convert PDF files which opens the dialog to select the folder whose files are to be converted in batch mode see also section 4 3 2 5 Convert PDF to Snapform File view Batch conversion sles About The Help menu see Fig 4 7 contains as only menu item About which opens a window with the program identification In addition to the Select Page submenu there is a toolbar below the menu bar containing a drop down menu with a page selector see Fig 4 8 C snapform_maual_examples f1120_4p pdf File View Batch conversion Help k Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 2 3 Fig 4 9 ThePreferences dialog
214. ges will display the report The title of the report has already been specified for the data entry table in the Header text property Further entries are in the Configure table window see Fig 4 136 The column widths for the report are identical to the ones of the data entry table and have been defined in that step The column headers have been defined in the Header column and the choice of columns with a total has been specified with the Show total check box The Column for message property should if possible be specified as otherwise there is no reference in the form to the report page It doesn t matter for the Print preview whether the according column is able to display the text see listing which means that date or number fields do work The field must however be wide enough to display the whole text The font type and size used for the text is controlled with the stylesheet of the column field For the report title and the column header a suitable stylesheet must be selected Style for report title and Style for report headers The Default stylesheet is applied by default The report will be added if not specified otherwise after the last page of the form When it should appear at another place in the form select the page after which it should appear in the Print report after page property 4 217 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 7 3 Chapter 4 Forms Development Finally specify by clicking
215. h an image field When the cursor hovers over such a field it changes to the image inserting cursor see Fig 4 38 When the user clicks on this field a File Open dialog opens to select the image file to be inserted This image will then be included in the document and remains there after saving The document images gdf see Fig 4 39 shows various examples of Images After selecting an image field the properties window and the expression editor display information about the features of that image field Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 39 Sample image fields from images qdf Chapter 4 Forms Development eee images qdf Snapform Viewer ee eS ee a FRItax Google Google hitp mew googie chimagestiogo em a lt 1 1 gt 1 Im000 Image field 113 5 pt wide 60 7 pt high image start_panel_top png inserted into document 2 Im001 Image field 129 3 pt wide 63 7 pt high URL of image defined as a constant 3 Im003 Image field 113 6 pt wide 60 7 pt high URL of image defined in text field Tx000 indirect reference Im005 Image field 96 pt wide 96 pt high user input allowed 5 Im002 Image field 109 7 pt wide 133 2 pt high URL controlled via check box Cb000 6 Im004 Image field 465 3 pt wide 260 pt high URL controlled via set of 5 radio buttons The expressions for items 2 3 and 5 are listed above They can also be displayed in the expression editor by double
216. h is based on XML technologies Data is represented in XML and can be processed in a simple and straightforward manner Snapform allows an electronic version of the form to be integrated into paper based workflows The addition of barcodes can help streamline these processes The forms developer is supported by a unique palette of entry objects and predefined expressions The Snapform Viewer is available in more than 32 different languages which makes it an excellent choice for deploying forms in a global environment Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 Chapter 1 Introduction About this manual Users This manual is designed for forms managers forms developers as well as individuals responsible for electronic forms who plan create maintain and distribute Snapform forms This manual provides sufficient information for anyone working with Snapform forms to successfully fulfill their tasks Conventions Representation in the Text This manual uses various display conventions Menu names are displayed in this font Buttons are represented either as an icon or with their name represented in this font Texts of GUl Elements such as dialogs error messages etc are represented in this font Keyboard keys are represented as in this example lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Note that the characters engraved on the keyboard may differ depending on the origin and localization of the keyboard Keyboar
217. h leading zero e g 08 mm Minute e g 15 As separator allowed are Period 7 Slash Space Colon When this property has a value the entered date will be validated and accepted only when it is later or equal than the specified minimum date see also notes to Maximum date Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Maximum date Configure boxing Fig 4 70 Configuration window for field boxing in date fields Boxing mode Distance between boxes Chapter 4 Forms Development When this property has a value the entered date will be validated and accepted only when it is earlier or equal than the specified maximum date When the value is outside of the range specified by Minimum date and Maximum date a message appears which indicates the accepted range and the entered date gets discarded An empty field or a deleted entry will not be validated Date fields are always boxed character by character This kind of field is also called comb fields Clicking on for this property opens the configuration window see Fig 4 70 Configure boxing Boxing mode Distance between boxes 150 width oF boxes The configuration window for field boxing allows you to set the following properties This check box activates and deactivates the field boxing When the box is checked the field gets boxed when it is unchecked the field does not get boxed The distance between t
218. he report is created In this case no detail data is shown in the table in the form but a message see listing is shown This text appears also in phantom tables when there is more than one row of data This property specifies the column in which this text is shown Clicking on this field opens a drop down menu with the numbers of the table columns The message text appears in the selected column The message text is hard coded and cannot be changed Note For phantom tables keep the following points in mind 1 The form element for the according column must be able to display text 2 In order to make the text appear the check box Show total must have been checked for that particular column This property specifies the stylesheet used for the title of the report table Primarily the font information defined in the stylesheet is applied Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu containing the list of the stylesheets available for the form 4 206 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Style for report headers Print report after page 4 4 7 2 Fig 4 137 Placing form elements in the table container Chapter 4 Forms Development The text of the header is specified in the Header text property of the table container This property specifies the stylesheet used for the column headers of the report table Primarily the font information defined in the stylesheet is applied Clicking on this property opens a drop down
219. he Windows version Fig 3 4 Themenu bar ofthe Macintosh version 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 Fig 3 5 The Snapform Designer menu Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Menu bar The menu bar contains the most important functions of the Snapform Designer The menu items are context dependently active Inactive elements are greyed out and can not be selected The menu bar is platform dependent The Windows version is shown in Fig 3 3 and the Macintosh version in Fig 3 4 Snapform Designer File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help The menu bar of the Windows version is a subset of the Macintosh menu bar The Apple menu and the menu Snapform Designer are not present i Snapform Designer EN File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help e e298 Snapform Designer The Apple Menu Macintosh specific The Apple menu does not contain any menu items relevant for the Snapform Designer The Snapform Designer Menu Macintosh specific The Snapform Designer menu see Fig 3 5 is specific for the Macintosh implementation and contains application dependent menu items provided by the system Siu e etme File Ec About SnapForm Designer Preferences amp Services gt Hide SnapForm Designer 3H Hide Others XH Show All Quit SnapForm Designer N Q Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 3 User Manual Using the Snapform Designer Note For these screen shots the specific English language version was used This menu item is therefor
220. he arguments Example see func_time qdf Shows the day of month of the date date_value Example see func_date qdf Shows the number of the month of the date date_value Example see func_date qdf Shows the number of the year of the date date_value Example see func_date qdf Shows the hour number of the time time_value Example see func_time qdf Shows the minute number of the time time_value Example see func_time qdf Calculates the date which is from the date date_value away by number of days Example see func_date qdf 4 251 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual addMonth date_value number addYear date_value number addHour time_value number addMinute time_value number calcDays date_first date_second calcHours date first date_second calcMinutes date_first date_second 4 5 2 6 Chapter 4 Forms Development Calculates the date which is from the date date_value away by number months Example see func_date qdf Calculates the date which is from the date date_value away by number years Example see func_date qdf Calculates the time which is from the time time_value apart by number of hours Example see func_time qdf Calculates the time which is from the time time_value apart by number of minutes Example see func_time qdf Calculates the number of days between the entered dates Example see func_date qdf Calculates the number of hours between the entered dates Exa
221. he boxes for the individual characters in Points Default value is 1 5 pt In date fields the distance between the boxes can Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Width of boxes 4 4 2 6 Fig 4 71 Masked input field cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development be individually set The number of fields for the spaces depends on the selected date format for the format d M yy 3 fields are available for the format dd MM yyyy there are 7 fields Helpful Hint t is recommended to verify the settings at a high zoom factor The width of a box for the individual characters measured in Points The default value is 11 3 pt Masked input Data entry fields oftenneed to be in a specific format in order to be valid A simple example is a certain required date format which is handled with a date field Such an entry must match a mask The entry field used for such purpose is the Masked input field Masked input fields verify the entered values according to the specified mask and accept only characters which are valid for that specific position They may convert them accordingly They may also contain fixed characters which are inserted automatically When filling out a form and a masked input field is active the mask is shown as default The entry positions are marked with a place holder When data is entered the placeholders are replaced character by character with the entered characters The Masked input field tool creates a fiel
222. he cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow Note The field will automatically be scaled to a square when an anchor point is moved The longer side determines the size of the square The other features of the Datamatrix barcode field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 124 4 176 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 124 Properties of a Datamatrix barcode field Properties of Datamatrix barcode Property Value Mame Bedoo0 Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left AO e742 Top 35 3933 width 43 00 Height 43 00 Transparent Back color Barcode color Encoding Format Module size Process tilde Name The name of the Datamatrix barcode field in the document This name can be changed Category Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used 4 177 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Taborder Printable Visible Required Value
223. he direction of the line matters such as for dashed lines and in other contexts for arrows Normally a line is drawn from left to right but when this box is checked it is drawn from right to left Helpful Hint t is most efficient for the workflow to place the line associated to the Line tool cursor into the vincinity of the intended position and then completely define it via the properties window The document linien gdf see Fig 4 25 shows various examples of Lines After selecting a line in the Snapform Designer the properties window displays information about the features of that line a dp lines qdf Snapform Viewer ild A Ores 209 Tea 1 2 m 8 BHEHEHEEHES amp LE m v 11 lt 1 1 gt Ln0O0 Default Line horizontal 60 pt long 1 pt wide black Ln001 horizontal 60 pt long 3 pt wide black Ln002 horizontal 120 pt long 1 pt wide red Ln003 vertical 125 pt long 1 pt wide black AUN 4 32 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 5 2 Fig 4 26 Rectangle tool cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Ln004 diagonal left bounding box 60 x 60 pt 6 pt wide black Ln005 diagonal right bounding box 60 x 20 pt 4 pt wide black Ln006 horizontal 120 pt long 1 pt wide dash size 6 pt black Ln007 horizontal 120 pt long 8 pt wide dash size 8 pt black 9 Ln008 horizontal 40 pt long 40 pt wide black 10 Ln0O9 diagonal right bounding box 40 x 4
224. he element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For rectangles the stylesheet definition has however no relevance Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Chapter 4 Forms Development Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence which is logical because the rectangle is not an active element When the box is checked the rectangle will be printed When the box is checked the rectangle is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated and cannot be changed Clicking on this field opens the expression editor for assembling an expression For Rectangle elements an expression is however used very rarely When this box is checked the rectangle gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog become inactive Access to these properties is resumed only after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the rectangle Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the
225. he specific literature A short description of the barcodes supported in Snapform can however be found in section 4 4 5 2 The Barcode tool The Barcode tool creates a field in which a 1D barcode can be displayed After selecting the tool a cursor with a Barcode element in default size appears see Fig 4 101 a Assigned to the Barcode tool is an 1D barcode field 96 pt wide and 48 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Be and a 4 125 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 102 Newly created barcode field Chapter 4 Forms Development three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first barcode field placed in a form has therefore the name Bcooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 102 the first barcode field of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help aoas Camek nn a E e x Proveris of 10 barcodes Property Value g g F a a f3 2 N Name Bc000 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 30 380 400 Categor ae PEP EA ON TPA AN E OPA TOPET i E EAST TENET E T EAE EA EET sil Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable 40 7609 38 3152 96 00 48 00 Transparent Back color Barcode color C Barcode type Unit width cm 0
226. he user of Snapform to make sure that these license terms are accordingly honored Clicking on the Delete font button removes the selected font from the list 4 259 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development Snapform has the option of supplemental font support which allows you to specify the exact font depending on the platform When the Supplemental font support check box is active the Supplemental font support area is shown which consists of three entry fields Font name Windows Font name Mac OS X and Font name Unix where the according font can be specified The options from the Border settings area are valid for all form elements as far as borders are activated in the respective properties The Default color is the color the border has in its normal appearance Clicking on the button opens the color picking window see section 3 2 9 2 and the appropriate color can be selected The Alpha slider controls the transparency of the color The lower this value is the more transparent the border or the area of the element is rendered The value for Alpha is displayed in a field right of the slider and it can be entered directly The value can be between 0 and 255 Note The principles for setting the color are valid for all areas of the stylesheet editor Mouse over color is the color of the border when the mouse cursor is within the perimeter of the element On focus color is the color of the borde
227. her purpose of the function is using webservices as long as their response comes in a suitable format importData url as well as Snapform data structure see func_misc qdf getDatalD Identifier function Creates an unique identification string GUID Global Unique Identifier which can be linked to a set of forms data This function has no arguments Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 30 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference String Creates a structured string consisting of 36 randomly selected characters The algorithm used for this purpose ensures that this string is unique world wide compared with other strings created in the same way This identifier can for example be used with data transfers or in digital workflows createGUID getSessionID getPrintID getPrintldStr length digits getRandomString length digits see func_ident qdf getDay date_value Date function Shows the day of month of the date date_value date_value valid date Whole number between 1 and 31 Returns the day of month of the entered date date_value The entered date may be in the future or in the past This function is part of the inverse function of Date year month day getMonth date_value getYear date_value Date year month day other date functions see
228. herefore also for the required and available amount of data for the error correction to know the structure of the data in order to reduce overhead control characters etc Snapform supports four widely used 2D barcode systems Aztec PDF 417 Datamatrix and QRCode As these codes are based on different concepts it has been decided to create an individual tool for each of these four systems instead of one 2D barcode tool These tools and their barcodes are explained in the following sections Aztec barcode The Aztec barcode is a square shaped high density matrix symbology Its data capacity is 3832 numeric characters 3067 alphanumeric characters or 1914 bytes binary data First samples of this code reminded people of Central American pyramids and that lead to its name The encoded data is organized as layers square rings around a central symbol This configuration leads to 32 different discrete symbol sizes between 15 x 15 modules and 151 x 151 modules Layers are always topped off with error correction information The central symbol is a prominent feature and can be easily recognized by the image processor Additional modules at the corners of the central symbol specify the orientation which allows reading the symbol from any direction As the code is generated from the inside out no silence area white space around the symbol is necessary Even if the outermost layer cannot be reliably read the error correction
229. hijklmno parstuvwxyz plus non displayable control characters Application industry This is medium density numeric code Code 11 is a discrete symbology with variable length The code is not very secure because printing errors can create valid characters However it contains one for payloads up to 10 characters or two for more than 10 characters check sums which are not displayed in the clear text line Valid characters 0123456789 Application telecommunication in North America This is a medium density quasi numeric code Codabar is a discrete self checking symbology of variable length The code always begins with a Start character A B C D and ends with a Stop character also A B C D Start and Stop characters may be used to hold some information The individual characters begin and end with a black bar and must therefore be separated with a narrow separator Valid characters 0123456789 plus Start and Stop character Application logistics photo labs This is the PostNet code developed by the US Post Office for sorting mail PostNet is a numeric symbology with variable length in the 4 143 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 5 3 Chapter 4 Forms Development original application it was limited to 5 9 or 11 characters payload In the PostNet code the data is encoded via the height of the bars which allows for a bad printing quality dot matrix printers The code contains a check sum m
230. his leads immediately to the resolution of the image in that particular case This resolution is a measure of the quality in which the image can be displayed and printed For color and greyscale images the following resolutions are considered to be sufficient 72 dpi for on screen 150 dpi for office printers 300 dpi for printing presses For black white images the resolutions are 72 dpi for screen 300 dpi for office printers 1200 dpi for printing presses These resolutions should not be exceeded too far because the according display device cannot process considerably higher resolutions The consequence of too high resolutions is an unnecessarily large file and long data transmission times Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 35 Image tool cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Snapform Designer supports the following graphic formats for Image elements JPEG BMP TIFF GIF and PNG Note JPEG is a very compact format but uses a lossy compression which leads to artifacts and blurriness around high contrasts High contrast occurs particularly with scanned text and line art For this kind of images the JPEG format is not suitable Use TIFF PNG or GIF instead The Image tool creates a field in which a raster graphic can be loaded After selecting the tool a cursor with a Image element in default size appears see Fig 4 35 Assigned to the Image tool is an image field 96 pt wide and 96 pt high Clicking the mouse places it o
231. ht of the bounding box of the Label element This property defines how the text is horizontally aligned in the label When the property field is clicked a drop down menu appears with the options left center right which places the text left aligned centered or right aligned within the label Default is left With unformatted text with multiple lines each line is aligned as specified With the HTML form the longest line of a text block is aligned as specified All other lines are then left aligned to this reference line This property defines how the text is vertically aligned in the label 4 58 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Back color Text color Rotation angle Transparent Check box Chapter 4 Forms Development When the property field is clicked a drop down menu appears with the options top center bottom which places the text top aligned centered or bottom aligned within the label Default is center This property is fully honored only with text in HTML form In this case the HTML text block gets aligned Single line unformatted text is always aligned to the bottom border of the field Multi line unformatted text is always aligned to the top border of the field Background color of the label By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color The background color is only applied when the Transparent check box is unchecked Color of the t
232. ication vendor mail info ringler ch application vendor url www snapforms ci awt colormode java awt image Di awt nativeDoubleBuffering true awt screen resolution 72 awt screen size 1280 x 800 awt toolkit apple awt CToolki com apple mrj application apple menu about name SnapForm Designe exe4j moduleName Applications Snaj file encoding MacRoman fipapppocina nka sun in uT Preferences This is a placeholder provided by the operating system to be used for a general preferences window Snapform Designer does not have any user configurable options some base settings are automatically set depending on the context Services This is a Macintosh specific menu item which provides access to the various services provided by the operating system and other installed applications The options of this menu item are installation dependent and don t have a direct relationship to the Snapform Designer Hide Snapform Hides all Snapform Designer windows Designer Hide Others Hides all other running applications except the Snapform Designer Quit Snapform Closes the Snapform Designer Designer Note Under Windows the command to exit the Snapform Designer is located in the File menu 3 6 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 3 2 2 3 Fig 3 8 The File Menu New Form Open Form Open Background layer Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer The File Menu The File menu see Fig 3 8 contains file oriented commands such as opening and
233. ich can be evaluated on application level This property is deactivated in the default setting The Aztec barcode allows to chain up to 26 symbols and achieve an accordingly higher data capacity When reading chained symbols the reading unit stores the data and assembles it Only when all symbols have been read the data will be passed on This appears to subsequent processes as if a huge symbol had been read 4 160 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Str Append count Str Append index Str Append FilelD Chapter 4 Forms Development When this box is checked the according symbol is part of a structurally chained group Otherwise the symbol is self contained When this property is selected the properties Str Append count and Str Append index must have a value they are also activated in the Properties window This property indicates how many symbols there are in the structurally chained group to which the symbol belongs Valid values are between 2 and 26 The value 1 means that the group consists of one single symbol and therefore the symbol is self contained This property is normally deactivated It gets activated when the Struct Append property is activated This property represents the index number of the symbol in the structurally chained group Valid values are between 1 and 26 This property is normally deactivated It gets activated when the Struct Append property is activated It is possible to s
234. icking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Pw and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first password field placed in a form has therefore the name Pwooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 80 the first password field of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer New form Fie Edit Format Controls View Tools Help Fioge J ewe OO 1 1 YBBR am e E s Editor x ST Property Value Name Pw000 Eee co oo ton smo vo Mo too amo zzo zan aeo zao omo oza om ooo oeo 0 Ilcategoy Stylesheet Default 10 Draft Preview EEEN 45 6522 46 4674 96 00 12 00 Tooltip text Linkto object Controls Tools Find amp replace 228 Pw000 Tab 10 4 a A H i a g 2 aa 3 B 3 8 eres Bar BEEE lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the password field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other featu
235. ield has no length limitation Note Snapform has as almost any other software too a technically caused limitation of the size of numbers This limit is at 16 significant digits Numbers with more than 16 digits are either rounded or truncated It is recommended to limit entry fields to a smaller number of significant digits when there is a chance that too many digits will be used It is also recommended for strings consisting of digits which are not numbers such as serial numbers to use text fields with selected Only digits option When filling in the form text that is too long is displayed in smaller font size and with condensed characters so that it completely fits into the field The consequence is that text can become unreadable rather quickly It is therefore important to estimate the text size when planning the form and to provide text fields with an appropriately sized data entry field When this box is checked leading zeros are not suppressed This is important for serial numbers or certain types of page numbers When the box gets checked the value of Length is set to 8 if it was 0 before and Rounding is set to the value Integer Note When this box gets accidentally checked the two mentioned settings must be carefully checked and manually be set to their original values Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Rounding Fig 4 63 The Rounding drop down menu Chapter 4 Forms Development Rounding normally occurs as
236. ield name or result of another calculation boolean TRUE when x is empty otherwise FALSE Tests whether the argument contains the empty value or null This can be for example useful when the completeness of the form is verified or if catching erroneous results when it is possible that not allowed values may be present such as when a division by 0 is possible no related functions see func_misc qdf Left string count String function Returns the first count characters counted from left of the string string string string or name of a text field count number of characters to be returned positive integer Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 51 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference String or empty value when string has fewer characters than specified in count Returns the first count characters of the string string The characters are counted from the left hand side This function returns only a valid value when string has a length of at least count characters When string is shorter the empty value is returned Right string count SubStr string start count and other string functions see func_string1 qdf Len x String function Returns the length number of characters of the string x String numeric positive integer or empty value when x is not a
237. ilto info snapform com 3 Click here to register 4 How to keep a newbie busy for hours L lt 1 3 gt 4 228 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 8 2 Fig 4 156 nfopoint tool cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development 1 HI000 Simple hyperlink to a web page URL http www snapform com 2 HI001 Hyperlink to mail client URL mailto info snapform com 3 H1002 Hyperlink to mail client with pre filling of Subject and Body underlining unchecked URL mailto info snapform com subject Registration amp body 20want 20to 20register 4 H1003 Internal hyperlink to label Lb000 which is on the second page of the form selection in Link to object see Fig 4 153 Infopoints A great advantage of electronic forms is that additional information and explanations can be made available and displayed very easily at the place where they are needed without overloading the form One possibility to display explanations is the mousetip help for entry fields This is very useful but it should only contain field related information In addition there are hyperlinks which refer to external sources or an accordingly created page of the document itself For situations where additional information is not directly connected with a field and you don t want the user to be drawn too far away from the page of the form Snapform has so called Infopoints An infopoint is an active element where text appears when the u
238. ime when a general recalculation occurs Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Locked Left Top Width Height Chapter 4 Forms Development It is also possible to set up an indirect reference In this case the URL is stored in a text field and its value is used in the calculation item 3 in the sample document images qdf see Fig 4 39 The expression for this is Text000 Where the URL must be the value of the text field Tx000 The result of a slightly more complex expression is the reference via a check box item 5 in the sample document images gdf see Fig 4 39 The expression for this is if Cb000 http www snapform com img s blue jpg http www snapform com img s green jpg When the check box ebooo is checked the file s b uejpg is loaded the blue Gecko otherwise the file s green jpg is loaded the green Gecko Even more sophisticated logic is demonstrated in item 6 of the sample document images qdf When this box is checked the image field is locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after unchecking this box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the image field Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element me
239. imiter value1 value2 see func_table2 qdf checkCardNumber value Consistency check function Validates credit card numbers value number or string corresponding to a credit card number boolean TRUE or FALSE Validates the formal validity of a credit card number using the Luhn algorithm also known as MOD 10 algorithm When the validation is successful the result is TRUE otherwise it is FALSE When the entered value is not numeric or a string the result is NULL checkMod10 value getMod10 value see func_consist qdf checkMod10 value Consistency check function Validates number using the MOD 10 algorithm value number or string may only contain number and space characters Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 17 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference boolean TRUE or FALSE Validates the formal validity of numbers using the MOD 10 algorithm When the validation is successful the result is TRUE otherwise it is FALSE When the entered value is not numeric or a string the result is NULL checkCardNumber value getMod10 value checkMod10r value see func_consist qdf checkMod10r value Consistency check function Validates number using the Recursive MOD 10 algorithm value number or string may only contain number and space chara
240. ins a match of the pattern defined in the Regular Expression regex An overview over the Regular Expression syntax can be found in section 5 4 find string regex start replaceAll orig_string regex replace_with see func_regex qdf Max x y Math function Determines the greater of the two values x numeric any value y numeric any value numeric Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Explanation See also Example 5 3 55 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also 5 3 96 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference Determines the greater of the two values x and y and returns it When both values are equal that value is returned Min x y see func_math1 qdf Min x y Math function Determines the smaller of the two values x numeric any value y numeric any value numeric Determines the smaller of the two values x and y and returns it When both values are equal that value is returned Max x y Now Date function Returns the current time This function has no arguments Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 57 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference Time Returns the current time In order to display it a date field formatted as time is necessary getHour time_va
241. ion table the values for the column width should be verified In an unmodified table the values of the width of the column fields are used This means that the columns of the data entry table are proportionally the same width as the columns in the form It may be useful in certain cases to modify the column widths in the report for example the width of labels In tables with multiline logical rows it is important that the numbering of the columns occurs strictly from left to right and does not consider the visual row of the according field It is important to define column headers properly see below In any case column headers should be entered While these headers are present in the form they must be explicitly specified for the data entry table in the Header column The Show total check box may be checked This means that the button to open the data entry table will be displayed and that in the data entry table the current column total for the according table is shown This total is also displayed in the report The total is only displayed if the field type of the column allows it With this the data entry table is specified In Preview mode the button to open this table appears The example sown in Fig 4 143 comes from the sample file tables gdf 4 215 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 143 Data entry table for item 3 of tables qdf Fig 4 144 Toolbarofthedata entry table Cut amp Copy Paste
242. irst If there are unsaved changes a dialog appears asking whether the document should be saved see Fig 3 10 Saves the form under its existing name An older version of the file will be overwritten Opens a File Save dialog where the target directory and the file name can be entered selected see Fig 3 9 Save as Snapform Examples english eee E 1_infopoint qdf amp 1 _labels1 qdf 5 aztec qdf 8 checkbuttons qdf amp code39_Family qdF 8 datamatrix qdf ai ean_family qdF 8 entryfields qdF amp etc_family qdF 8 func_barcode qdF a Func_combobox qdf 8 Func_consist qdF amp Func_date qdf 8 Func_ident qdF E func_math1 qdf 8 Func_math2 qdf amp idbarcodes_general qdF 8 Func_misc qdF 8 _ Template_ORIG qdf amp Func_regex qdF 8 Func_status qdf amp Func_string1 qdf 8 Func_string2 qdF 8 Func_table1 qdf amp Func_time qdF 8 hyperlinks qdf amp infopoint qdF 8 labels1 qdF E labels2 qdF amp lines qdf amp numeric_Family qdF E pdf417 qdf 8 qrcode qdF amp rectangles qdf 8 s_func_math1 qdf amp tabellen qdF 8 table_selectors qdf amp tooltip qdf The following file formats are available File name infopoint Snapform QDF A format qdF Snapform template qdFt Snapform QDF format template qdft Snapform field layer hdo Files of type Snapform QDF A format qdf
243. is necessary addMonth date_value number addYear date_value number calcDays date_first date_second Date year month day getDay date_value Today other date functions see func_date qdf addHour time_value number Date function Calculates the time which is from the time time_value apart by number of hours time_value valid time number integer Time Returns the time which is by number of hours apart from the entered time time_value The entered time can be in the future or the past A positive value for number means that the resulting time is in the relative future from the entered time and a negative number means that the resulting time is in the relative past from the entered time For calculations from the current time it is possible to use as the value for time_value the function Now If the value for number has numbers after the decimal sign they will be ignored Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 9 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference In this function only hours are added up The value for the minutes remains unchanged If minutes must be taken into account as well use the function addMinute time_value number to calculate minutes In order to display the result an accordingly formatted date field is necessary format HH mm It is possible to format the date field as a date format In thi
244. is box is checked the table container including all assigned field elements are displayed on screen This property is always deactivated and cannot be changed This property is shown with table containers but not active and it cannot be activated When this box is checked the table container and all its contained form elements get locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive also for the check boxes within the container Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box The form elements assigned to the table container can be selected and their properties can be displayed but it is not possible to change them 4 200 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Left Top Width Height Horizontal row direction of columns Chapter 4 Forms Development X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the table container Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the table container Width of the bounding box of the table container Height of the bounding box of the table container This property defines the direction in which a logical row runs A logical row corresponds to the
245. is used to identify the Snapform Viewer working session and it remains constant for the whole length of the session Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 42 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference createGUID getPrintID getDatalD getRandomString length digits see func_ident qdf getValues delimiter value value2 Table function Assembles the values of the indicated fields to a string using the delimiter character delimiter delimiter delimiting character must be entered between double quotes value valuen Name of the fields whose values are to be assembled to form the result String Assembles the values of the fields specified as value valuen to a string The delimiting character is delimiter This function is primarily used for preparing data streams for 2D barcodes but it can also be used for data transfers The field names must not be part of a table Values of fields which are assigned to table elements will not be added to the result To read out values from tables use the function TblValues table tbl_start tbl_end row_start row_end delimiter column column Field values are represented as strings even if they were originally defined as numbers or dates TblValues table tbl_ start tbl_ end row_start row_end delimiter column columnl
246. ith the extended bars This property is only active when the code type EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A or UPC E has been selected With the other code types it is ignored For application in the retail business it should always be selected Several barcode symbologies are classified as discrete codes In these symbologies the equivalents of characters may be present on their own without being part of a greater entity In these symbologies an empty space between the character symbols can be defined whose task it is to create a distance between the characters This empty space is defined as Intercharacter spaceholder and it is specified as a multiple of the unit width 4 136 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual PostNet tall bar height and PostNet short bar height Supplement bar height factor Supplement distance cm Chapter 4 Forms Development This property is only active when the code type Code 11 Codabar Bar 39 or Bar 39 Ext has been selected With the other code types it is ignored The encoding in the PostNet code is done via different bar heights These two properties specify the absolute dimensions of the bars in centimeters The ratio between tall and short bar length as well as the absolute sizes are defined in the PostNet specification The default values 0 125 and 0 25 cm follow the specification These properties are only active when the code type PostNet has been selected With the other code types they are
247. ithout check digit Bc007 Code 93 Extended text CODE 93ext with check digit ON A OA AUN gt The document numeric_family qdf see Fig 4 107 viewed in the Snapform Viewer shows various examples of numeric 1D barcodes Note The Draft mode view is identical to Fig 4 105 eee numeric_family qdf Snapform Viewer BA SA e o bo 1D Barcodes of the numeric group 123456 123456 123456 123456 R III l l AAA 01234565 12345 123456 12345 12345677 123 45 1234567 123 45 N I MA l Il l Iii 123456789012A8 123 452 123456789012 123 45 lt 11 gt Bc000 2 of 5 Code text 123456 without check digit Bc002 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code text 123456 with check digit Bc001 MAT 25 Code text 123456 without check digit Bc003 MSI Code text 123456 without check digit Bc004 Code 11 short text 1234567 with check digit Bc006 Code 11 long text 123456789012 with check digit Bc005 Codabar text 123 45 without check digit Start A Stop B Bc007 Codabar text 123 45 with check digit Start C Stop C ON A OA AUN 4 146 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development The document ean_family qdf see Fig 4 108 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows different examples of the retail business barco
248. itioning of the group Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the group All other properties displayed in the Properties window cannot be changed Elements contained in a group can be selected in the object structure This allows you to change their properties However the positional properties Left Top Width Height are blocked These properties become available only after the group has been dissolved with the Ungroup command If the selected element is a group this command dissolves the Group into its parts This command allows to expand the selected group with additional elements being part of the selection Adds a new page at the end of the document This function is explained in section 4 3 4 1 Adds a new page in front of the current page This function is explained in section 4 3 4 1 Removes the current page This function is explained in section 4 3 4 1 The Format Menu The Format menu contains functions to align selected form elements see Fig 3 13 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 3 13 The Format Menu Submenu Align Fig 3 14 The menu Format gt Align Left Center Right Top Middle Bottom Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Format Controls View Align gt Make same size gt Spacing gt This menu is only active if at least two form elements ar
249. k AG In this example the string sin was searched for This string appears in various fields In the overview the search string is highlighted in red Double clicking the match activates the according element which can then be edited In the Replace with field the replacement string is entered which will replace the matches Clicking on the Replace or Replace all buttons replaces the matches accordingly Note When attempting to replace strings which may be part of expressions or are expression functions extreme caution is required when clicking on Replace all in order to prevent faulty expressions Expression editor When building smart electronic forms Expressions also called Formulas are among the most important components Expressions are assembled in the Expression editor see Fig 3 28 Functions are assembled in the identically looking Function editor Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 3 28 The Expression editor Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Edit formula Formula Yariables Operators Functions Constants Functions a x y A String manipulation A TRUE Paget y A i t Im_HeaderPagel x y Len x pi Titlel x y Left string count e LbO0 ix Right string count Nx_Number x ty SubStr string start count Lboo9 x InStr string pattern start_position LbO1O x lt gt y TrimStr string z Lb008 g gt yv wile j
250. kground colors te mark status of required fields J Empty fields Alpha Entered fields L Alpha Highlighted empty fields L Alpha LCI CIC new clone _ __ Delete In the Input controls and labels settings the background and text color for various states of input fields is controlled Background color is the color of the background of the field if it has not been overridden in the Back color property of the element Text color is the color of the text if it has not been overridden in the properties of the element The Default field setting is as the name says it the default setting for the empty element Calculated field contains the settings for a field which displays the result of a calculation Calculated field overwritten contains the settings for a field which displays the result of a calculation but has been manually overwritten Read only field contains the settings for a field which has been made non writable by setting the read only property Selection contains the settings for a list box or combo box field 4 261 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 170 The Stylesheet editor Infopoints and hyperlinks tab Chapter 4 Forms Development Negative numbers contains the settings when the value of a number field is negative Required fields controls the display behavior of fields which have been marked as required When the option Use icon to mark required fields has be
251. king on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For entry fields the General 4 66 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Chapter 4 Forms Development settings and Input controls and labels tabs in the stylesheet editor have been made for the presentation of different states of entry fields Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is assigned automatically and is in the order of the field tab sequence beginning with 10 and incremented in steps of 10 The first field of the form has tab order value 10 the second the value 20 etc The tab order value can be changed so that a specific tabbing sequence can be created which has no relationship with the order the fields have been added When the box is checked the entry field will be printed When the box is checked the entry field is displayed on screen When this box is checked the entry field must have a value entered in order for the form to be valid more about validity of the form see section 4 8 4 2 This property can be used twofold for entry fields First the default value of the field can be specified by entering a simple value second an expression can be specified whose result is displayed in the field A simple value is the default value which is dis
252. ld tool is a text field 96 pt wide and 12 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Tx and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first text field placed in a form has therefore the name Tx000 In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 54 the first text field of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 54 Newly created text field Chapter 4 Forms Development Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help aosa m OO An Baa aalsa Q Draft Preview vale 1x000 o 2 42 e so i0 120 140 10 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 349 300 380 400 EEE A EAE Ee Te a AN AA EE ee Default 10 41 5761 39 9457 96 00 12 00 Single use field Tooltip text Horizontal alignment Lengti Configure boxing Linkto object Only digits Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace amp Form a ES lo a e i E g E S a g al al hh i m m E Bal lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the text field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing a
253. le directions of the line see Fig 4 24 Horizontal Horizontal The options have the following meaning The line runs horizontally from left to right The line runs vertically from top to bottom The line runs diagonally in its bounding box from the bottom left corner to the top right corner The line runs diagonally in its bounding box from the top left corner to the bottom right corner This value determines whether the line is displayed whole or dashed The value 0 means that the line is displayed whole Other values indicate that the line is displayed dashed where the value is the length of the dash Helpful Hint A dotted line can be simulated by setting the dash size to the line width The stylesheet defines an element border which is normally not relevant for lines However when placing a line below an entry field with a visible border there can be a visible discrepancy between the line length and the field perimeter because the field s border is rendered outside of the actual field definition rectangle This property increases the length of the 4 31 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Draws right to left Fig 4 25 Line examples from linien qdf Chapter 4 Forms Development line when it is rendered in Preview mode or in the Snapform viewer by the width of the border as specified in the stylesheet so that it appears to be of the same size as the entry field with its border There are cases where t
254. le Edit Format Controls View Tools Help 00ga J as Ce eja Y m 2 g f Property value Name Radio000 oO 4 e s i0 120 eo 180 200 220 24 20 280 3 EN Stylesheet Default 10 9 S Preview Be Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 46 3483 Top 30 3371 Width 68 5714 Height 195 1659 Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace S Form Page 1 g Cb000 Tab 10 E cboo1 tab 20 E chong tab 30 re E a i g a e a lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The document structure shows in the example the association of the check boxes cb001 cb002 and cb003 to the radio button container Radio000 Check boxes which are present in the form when the radio button container is placed cannot be added to the radio button group except when they are placed again using Cut Paste check the tab order in this case Check boxes placed later on outside of the radio button container cannot be added to the radio button group either Check box fields which have been placed within a radio button container cannot be dragged outside of the container However it is possible to change the size of the radio button container so that check boxes will be outside of its perimeter These check boxes are still part of 4 113 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4
255. length It does not have self checking mechanisms built in However a check digit modulo 10 can be defined on application level Valid characters 0123456789 4 139 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Interleaved 25 MAT 25 MSI Chapter 4 Forms Development Application industry This code should not be used for new applications anymore because of its very low density Instead if a 2 of 5 type of code must be used at all the Interleaved 2 of 5 code should be chosen This is the Interleaved 2 of 5 code a medium density numeric code It is based on the Standard 2 of 5 but also uses the white space between the bars A character is represented with black bars or white separators two of them wide The Interleaved 2 of 5 code is a discrete symbology with variable length An even number of digits must always be defined if the number of digits in the payload is odd a leading 0 has to be added The code does not have self checking mechanisms However a check digit modulo 10 can be defined on application level Valid characters 0123456789 Application logistics This code is about one third shorter than a comparable Standard 2 of 5 code This is a very rare code for which no further description could be found This is the MSI or Modified Plessey code a low density numeric code A character is represented with a sequence of bars and spaces corresponding to its binary value The MSI code is a continuous symbology with vari
256. les of PDF 417 barcodes from SES p df4 17 qdf in 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 520 540 Draft mode moo UE EE Fig 4121 Examples of PDF O d ESES 417 barcodes from i gt Q o mw h i i pdf417 qdf in the Snapform Viewer PDF 417 Barcode eee ae T REET AEEA AESAAT TENN su T ASEARA T Ee i A i t n i 4 173 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 6 4 Chapter 4 Forms Development Bcp000 PDF 417 barcode 16 columns error correction level 2 Bcp001 PDF 417 barcode 16 columns error correction level 6 Bcp002 PDF 417 barcode 28 columns error correction level 2 Bcp004 PDF 417 barcode 16 columns error correction level 2 data pre compressed with compress x X 5 Bcp003 PDF 417 barcode 4 columns error correction level 2 AUN gt All five barcodes represent the text specified in the entry field according to the specific properties In the example file the text can be changed and the symbols change accordingly Datamatrix The Datamatrix barcode is high density 2D barcode symbology with square modules The maximum data capacity is 3116 numeric characters 2335 alphanumeric characters or 1556 Bytes of binary data The encoded data consists of square zones and the symbol itself is normally also square shaped Certain rectangular forms are po
257. lesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Transparent Back color Barcode color Barcode type Unit width crn Unit height tem Wide unit width Bar height ratio Rotation angle Text Stretch content Codabar start char Codabar stop char Code128 char set Check char guard bars Intercharacter separator Posthet tall bar height PostWet short bar height Supplement bar height Factor Supplement distance crm z digit supplement 5 digit supplement Supplement UPCE encoding system 4 129 Chapter 4 Forms Development value Bcood 4 Default 10 F 40 7609 36 3152 96 00 43 00 F P Bar 39 0 03 0 45 2 00 0 00 0 o F F 1 00 E Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Name Category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Chapter 4 Forms Development The name of the barcode field in the document This name can be changed Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For barcode fields only the Border settings in the General settings tab are used Sequence number of the element in the tab order
258. licking this button or double clicking the property field opens the text editing window see Fig 4 159 This window is identical to the short text editing window of entry fields see also section 4 4 2 1 As the explanatory text states it is possible to enter HTML code as well Edit text value Tips By specifying HTML codes in a text you can make it multiline using multiple fonts multiple colors and so on Make sure that text starts with lt html gt tag and ends with lt html gt tag Support HTML 3 2 lt html gt Heading levels lt hl gt Heading Hl lt hl gt lt h2 gt Heading H2 lt h2 gt lt h3 gt Heading H3 lt h3 gt lt h4 gt Heading H4 lt h4 gt lt h5 gt Heading H5 lt h5 gt lt h6 gt Heading H6 lt h6 gt lt hr align center size 2 gt lt center gt lt p gt A whole block lt br gt of text to be lt br gt centered lt p gt lt center gt lt html gt 4 233 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 160 nfopoint with text defined according to Fig 4 159 Chapter 4 Forms Development The text defined as HTML in Fig 4 159 appears in the Snapform Viewer as shown in Fig 4 160 Coe Heading levels Heading H1 Heading H2 Heading H3 Heading H4 Heading HS Heading Hs A whole block of text to be Simple text is displayed as it has been entered including line breaks The font type and size depends on the selected stylesheet HTML encoded text is displayed
259. link The default value is Hyperlink Clicking on this property opens the expression editor for the text entry This may either be a constant text as the default value or the result of a calculation which allows to assemble dynamic URLs Only simple text is supported HTML code is displayed literally When this box is checked the hyperlink gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the hyperlink Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the hyperlink 4 225 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Width Height Read only Horizontal alignment Rotation angle Transparent Draw underline URL Chapter 4 Forms Development Width of the bounding box of the hyperlink Height of the bounding box of the hyperlink When this box is checked the hyperlink is marked as read only and it cannot be activated The target may still be changed as the result of an expression A read only hyperlink is still visible to expressions and its assigned expressions are evaluated according to its state
260. logical group of fields in the table Normally the logical row is horizontal but it may also be vertical such as in a classical timetable field Note A Visual row is however as the name states purely visual and it may not have a context with the information displayed in the table A visual row is always horizontal and a visual column is always vertical In the following explanations it is stated whether a logical or a visual row or column is referred to When this box is checked the logical row runs horizontally and additional rows are added below the last current row In the other case the logical row runs vertically and additional rows are added to the right of the last current logical row This box is checked as default Note When this property is switched be aware that certain other properties are rotated In particular be aware that the Row height property value now represents the visual column width and that it must therefore be accordingly adjusted This property specifies how many columns are defined in the table This value corresponds essentially to the number of form elements which are 4 201 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual of visible rows Allow growth Chapter 4 Forms Development placed in the container check boxes which are part of a radio button group count individually When additional elements are added to the table container this value changes automatically This value
261. lopment The document etc_family gdf see Fig 4 109 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows different examples of other barcodes Code 128 EAN 128 PostNet Note The Draft mode view is identical to Fig 4 105 etc_family qdf Snapform Viewer E 1008 S 1D Barcodes others group 1234576890 123ABC amp ERT23 1234576890 123ABC amp ERT23 k PNT l HI i Il HULL 1234576890 123ABC amp ert23 1234576890 123ABC amp ert23 5 7 Veco Daadodootbootoadatatil 12345 1234576890 1234576890 12345 6 8 A A TA 12345678901 1234576890 1234576890 12345678901 CEL gt 9 1 Bc000 Code 128 text 1234567890 with check digit Char set A 2 Bc002 Code 128 text 1234567890 with check digit char set B 3 Bc001 Code 128 text 123ABC amp ERT23 with check digit starting char set A 4 Bc003 Code 128 text 123ABC amp ert23 with check digit starting char set A Bc004 Code 128 text 1234567890 with check digit char set C Bc006 EAN 128 Code text 1234567890 with check digit char set C Bc005 PostNet Code text 12345 with check digit Bc007 PostNet Code text 12345678901 with check digit CON WM 4 148 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 110 Examples from I dbarcodes_gener al qdf in Draft mode Chapter 4 Forms Development The document dbarcodes_general qdf
262. loses the content of the element providing more clarity in the display It is possible to select a single element or a group of elements The Properties window is updated accordingly and properties common for all selected elements can be set Tools The Tools window contains various settings which can make working with forms easier see Fig 3 25 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 3 25 The Tools window 3 2 7 3 Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace l L Mouse position x 370 5 y 183 0_ Move objects Distance pt 1 0 Click history x Y gt x width In the Mouse position area the current position of the mouse cursor is continuously updated and displayed In the Move objects area the distance can be specified in points by which objects are moved using the cursor keys When the Shift key is pressed at the same time the objects are moved 10 times the indicated distance When clicking on the workspace with the Control key pressed the mouse position is entered into the Click history table With every additional entry the distance from the first point in the X direction is entered in the gt x column and the distance in X direction from the previous point is entered in the Width column Clicking on the Reset button deletes the Click history table Find and Replace Selecting the Find amp Replace tab shows the Find Replace window
263. lt value name licensee type 4 gt false lt value gt lt values gt lt snapform gt lt Data gt lt Form gt lt CDATA QLpoOTFBWSZTWREBGEQAA07 11111111111 N71AAAASKCgAAoFUAqm9 fW4vVbs 3p5e0AAKAAjxMqp0dAo DHALAPr8xrPEfcjiG IZwcklbOMHyAwdKMAd10UGhvD204B60dUN6wwV1 AlsBg5EccH 4u5IpwoSAiAjCQA gt lt Form gt lt QDFA gt The elements are commented below lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt The XML header lt QDFA version 1 5 xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation http www snapform com open format snapform xsd xsi rdf http www snapform com open format rdf xsd gt QDFA is the main element of a QDF A form lt Metadata gt The Metadata element contains the metadata entered in the Form settings window Metadata tab see Abschnitt 4 8 5 lt rdf RDF xmlns rdf http www w3 org 1999 02 22 rdf syntax ns gt lt rdf Description rdf about Dublin Core xmlns dc http purl org dc elements 1 1 gt Metadata is used according to the Dublin Core specification Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 6 User Manual Snapform File Formats lt dc Title gt REQUEST FOR SERVICES lt dc Title gt lt dc Date gt 08 2005 lt dc Date gt lt dc Identifier gt NRC FORM 160 lt dc Identifier gt lt rdf Description gt lt rdfi RDF gt lt Metadata gt lt Data gt The Data block contains the data payload lt snapform gt The snap
264. lue There is information which may no longer be modified after initially filling out the form and whose fields must therefore be protected In Snapform this protection occurs in Single use fields which can be modified until the form is saved for the first time After that the field is marked as read only When this box is checked the selection of the combo box can be changed until the form is saved for the first time After saving for the first time the combo box will be marked as read only The Tooltip text is help text that appears when the mouse cursor hovers over the field for a certain time This text is in many cases the first and simplest help to the according field With increased requirements for accessibility the tooltip text becomes more and more important because screen readers use this information It is particularly important 4 121 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Editable Show values Fig 4 97 Selection with Show values unchecked Fig 4 98 Selection with Show values checked Hide button Horizontal alignment Chapter 4 Forms Development for government forms that the form designer inserts well thought out tooltips Double clicking on this property opens the Edit text value window see Fig 4 48 As indicated in the explanatory text it is also possible to enter text in HTML form for which the same rules apply as for labels For further notes about tooltip text see the description in section 4 4
265. lue getMinute time_value and the other time related date functions see func_math1 qdf replaceAll orig_string regex replace _with Regular Expression function Replaces all matches of the pattern defined in regex in the entered value orig_string with the string replace_with orig_string String regex Regular Expression replace_with String String Replaces all occurrences of the pattern defined in regex in the entered value orig_string with the string replace_with When there is no match the entered value is returned unchanged An overview over the Regular Expression syntax can be found in section 5 4 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 98 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference find string regex start match string regex see func_regex qdf Right string count String function Returns the first count characters counted from the right of the string string string string or name of a text field count number of characters to be returned positive integer String or empty value when string has fewer characters than specified in count Returns the first count characters counted from the right hand side of the string string This would be the last count characters if counting would be from the left hand side This function returns only a valid value when string has a l
266. ly the form description is compressed and encrypted data and metadata are displayed in an open XML form Reading and writing data does not require any specific tools The QDF format is described in the Snapform Schema The Schema is found at http www snapform com open_format snapform xsd It is also listed in section 6 9 The following code is an example which has been reduced to the essential elements lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt QDFA version 1 5 xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation http www snapform com open format snapform xsd xsi rdf http www snapform com open_ format rdf xsd gt lt Metadata gt lt rdf RDF xmlns rdf http www w3 org 1999 02 22 rdf syntax ns gt Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 6 User Manual Snapform File Formats lt rdf Description rdf about Dublin Core xmlns dc http purl org dc elements 1 1 gt lt dc Title gt REQUEST FOR SERVICES lt dc Title gt lt dc Date gt 08 2005 lt dc Date gt lt dc Identifier gt NRC FORM 160 lt dc Identifier gt lt rdfi Description gt lt rdfi RDF gt lt Metadata gt lt Data gt lt snapform gt lt id gt AF14A833 274C C57A 0237 015E0D8A3F54 lt id gt lt values gt lt value name contractor type 4 gt false lt value gt lt value name datel type 5 gt lt value gt lt value name form no type 3 gt lt value gt lt value name hq type 4 gt false lt value gt
267. m a text field they are concatenated Note Problems may occur when an operand looks like a number but still is a string type In this case the numbers are concatenated and not added up X y numeric x and y numeric Subtraction This operator subtracts the operand y from the operand x and returns the result The result is also numeric if both operands are numeric Otherwise the result is empty x y numeric x and y numeric Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Description 5 2 4 Type Type of operands Description 5 2 9 Type Type of operands Description 5 2 6 Type Type of operands Chapter 5 Expression language reference Multiplication This operator multiplies the two operands and returns the result The result is also numeric if both operands are numeric Otherwise the result is empty x y numeric x and y numeric Division This operator divides the operand x by the operand y and returns the result The result is also numeric if both operands are numeric Otherwise the result is empty Note With a division by 0 or an empty value the result is empty and there is no specific warning about the fact that subsequent results will be incorrect x Ay numeric x and y numeric Power This operator sets the operand x to the y th power and returns the result The result is also numeric if both operands are numeric Otherwise the result is empty x y numeric x and y numeric
268. me of the Combo box field This name can be changed Category Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid 4 119 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Chapter 4 Forms Development Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For combo boxes the stylesheet settings in the General settings are of importance Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is assigned automatically and is in the order of the field tab sequence beginning with 10 and incremented in steps of 10 The first field of the form has tab order value 10 the second the value 20 etc The tab order value can be changed so that a specific tabbing sequence can be created which has no relationship with the order the fields have been added When the box is checked the combo box will be printed When the box is checked the combo box is displayed on screen When this box is checked a selection must have been made from the combo box in order for the form to be valid more about validity of forms in section 4 8 4 2 It is possible to specify a constant value for a combo box but this does not
269. ments F hd Both the source and the target directory must be specified If an entry is missing the message Source files are not specified or Target folder is not specified appears after clicking on the Start button The batch conversion can be stopped any time by clicking the Stop button When the Close button is visible the process has completed Clicking the Close button closes the batch conversion dialog Conversion problems A conversion may not complete properly In such a case the according PDF document should be opened in Acrobat Professional and then viewed page per page Look for any error messages from Acrobat In many cases saving the document under another name will solve the issue If the problem persists try to print the document again using the Acrobat Distiller Adobe PDF printer see section 4 3 2 1 If the conversion always fails with a specific page try to extract the page from the document and convert it separately Also remove the page and convert the remaining document These two parts can be joined again in the Snapform Designer using the Add pages function Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 3 Chapter 4 Forms Development Because of differences in the internal data formats of the PDF and the Snapform Background image it is possible that certain style elements are not be entirely converted It is up to the forms designer to decide whether these elements are important and will be prepared
270. mo oza om ato oeo ao Ilcategoy Stylesheet Transparent Back color Barcode color Stretch content Unit width cm Unit height cm of columns Rows Error correction level 4 ve a ES fa a v j al a a g i Part of macro Macro ID Macro units count Macro unit number a e Value Bcp000 Default 10 55 4348 48 0978 192 00 48 00 0 20 12 o o Binary Controls Tools Find amp replace Form Page 1 I eepo00 Af ee lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the PDF 417 barcode field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the PDF 417 barcode field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 119 4 165 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 119 Properties of a PDF 417 barcode field Properties of POF4 1 7 barcode Property Value Mame Bcpooo Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible
271. mple see func_time qdf Calculates the number of minutes between the entered dates Example see func_time qdf State functions State functions are used to set a state printable visible writable of fields pages and categories The following functions are part of the group of state functions 4 252 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual setVisible category_lis t true false setPrintable category_ list true false setWritable category_ ist true false setFieldVisible true fal se field_name setFieldPrintable truelf alse field_name setFieldWritable true f alse field_name setPageVisible true fal se page_number page_number setPagePrintable true f alse page_number page_number 4 5 2 7 Chapter 4 Forms Development Sets the visible property of the affected category s Example see func_status qaf Sets the printable property of the affected category s Example see func_status qaf Controls the read only property of the according category s Example see func_status qaf Sets the visible property of the field Example see func_status qadf Sets the printable property of the field Example see func_status qaf Controls the read only property of the field Example see func_status qaf Sets the visible property of the affected page s Example see func_status qaf Sets the printable property of the affected page s Example see func_status qaf Consistenc
272. mport files must either be in the QDF A format or as XML using the Snapform data structure Field name field value pairs in the import file are loaded to the according fields of the form Field name field value pairs which have no according field in the form are ignored Files which have a non conforming structure are ignored as well getContent url as well as Snapform data structure see func_misc qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 47 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 48 Category Short description Chapter 5 Expression language reference IncVersion initial_ value step Math function Loop counter sets a counter to inital_value and increments it with each subsequent call by step initial_ value numeric step numeric numeric This function returns when it is called for the first time the initial value initial_value and keeps it stored With every subsequent call this value is incremented by the value step stored and returned This function can be used as a loop counter In this case both arguments are integers no related functions see func_math1 qdf InStr string pattern start_position String function Returns the position of pattern in the string string beginning with the search from position start_position Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expr
273. n rule When the form is considered to be incomplete the user must be notified This is done with the freely specifiable message from this field The text may be displayed in the form of a system message RDF Metadata For managing and archiving of documents properly established metadata is a fundamental issue Programmatic creation of the metadata ensures that additional sources of error by subsequent manual entry are avoided Snapform allows you to create elements of the Dublin Core Metadata Initiative Definition 1 1 to be specified static or as the result of an expression The RDF Metadata dialog see Fig 4 176 lists the metadata elements which are relevant for forms 4 276 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 176 The Form settings 4 8 6 RDF Metadata window Chapter 4 Forms Development RDF Metadata Dublin Core http purl org dc elements 1 1 Title Creator Subject Description a RS 6 3 Publisher 3 TA 5 SSIS SS SS SSS SSisic The RDF Metadata dialog consists of entry fields for the various metadata elements For an explanation of the meaning of these elements we refer to the documentation of the Dublin Core Metadata Initiative http www dublincore org The values can be entered either as static text or as the result of an expression For every element clicking on the Expression icon amp o
274. n rule z Page width mea Page height eo 4 Mathematik Funktionen Teil 2 Winkel und E Paper size Eiaa Orientation Landscape Companion page Visible Feldname Nr Number r Tools Pani Ne amber Formel Funktion Resultat Erkl rung Bart x roo mber Berechnet die Quadratwurze Controls Tools Find amp replace Find what Exp Berechnet den Exponentiahy Log x Berechnet den natirtichen Li sin Match case Match whole word Bin 004 Berechnet den Sinus eines i 7 Search all text Eos x Berechnet den Cosinus ei Search result Control LbUZS Value Berechnet den COSINUS eines in Grad Genine A Tan x nan Berechnet den Tangens eind Control Lb029 Value Asin x S sinx ah Berechnet den Arcus Sinus Control Nr007 Value Asin Nr_Number Control Lb030 Value Asin Nr_Number Acos x ba Berechnet den Arcus Cosi Control Lb031 Valve Berechnet den Arcus Sinus des Eingabewert us des Eingabewi tanix atan ir umber Berechnet den Arcus Tange a v ro a E a i E c B g z m a I B Total instances found 10 Replace with Replace Number of replacements 0 C Replace all 1976 2007 Ringler Informati
275. n the selector and the border of the table container Measuring unit is Points and the default value is 2 pt The selector has the same height as the field of the first table column and is approximately square so that two digits can be displayed without scaling These dimensions must be taken into account when placing tables When the Allow growth property is active and the table contains more rows than can be displayed a scrollbar appears at the right side of or below the table which allows navigating between the logical rows see Fig 4 132 4 203 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Header text Start numbering at Configure table Chapter 4 Forms Development This property controls the position of the scrollbar in relationship to the table container Measuring unit is Points and the default value is 2 Pt The appearance of the scrollbar is provided by the operating system and cannot be controlled from Snapform These dimensions must be taken into account when placing tables It is recommended that you test the form on all platforms on which it can be expected to be used This property specifies the header which gets printed on the listing tables This value appears also in the header of the data entry table of phantom tables Clicking on the property opens the expression editor The value can either be a fixed text or the result of a calculation This property supports only simple text HTML tags are not interpreted
276. n the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Im and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first image field placed in a form has therefore the name Imooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 36 the first image field of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 36 Newly created image field Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help caiene 1 BOR wale s e PA Properties of Image Property Name Category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top width Height Image name 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 180 180 200 220 240 260 260 300 320 340 300 380 400 Vk EAE EAE EAE EEA TEN TEA EAER EA a AT Stretch content X Stretch content Horizontal alignment Vertical alignment Allow input Value Im000 Default 10 Center Center Chapter 4 Forms Development Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace S Form Page 1 HBHRBOMBHBABABec s HAHA aan lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the image field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing an
277. napform Designer 5 x User Manual Number of pages Use background color Color 4 3 3 3 Fig 4 16 Properties of the new form Chapter 4 Forms Development Number of pages to create The drop down menu allows to select 1 to 20 pages If more pages are needed they can be added easily see also section 4 3 4 1 When this box is checked the background of the form will be in the color specified in the Color selection field When the check box Use background color is checked this field becomes active Double clicking this field or clicking on the button opens the color picking window see section 3 2 9 2 where the color can be specified Properties of new forms After selecting the background image or the parameters for the blank form two more parameters are necessary before the form can be created These parameters are part of the Common properties area see Fig 4 16 Create new form Form with background layer File Form without background layer Page size 150 A5 Orientation Portrait Actual size 148 0 x 210 0 mm Number of pages 3 Use background color Common properties Secure QDF S compact binary format Open QDF A open XML format File Format Stylesheet library LJ Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual File format Stylesheet library 4 3 4 Chapter 4 Forms Development The Snapform file format exists in two varieties encryp
278. nctions are functions which cannot be assigned to any of the other groups The following functions are part of the group of special functions Creates a ZLIB compressed byte sequence from the entered value which may be used in a barcode using the encoding method Binary Example see func_barcodes qdf Executes a comparison operation on the specified operands and returns a value depending on its result Example see func_misc qdf Tests whether the argument x is empty or null Example see func_misc qdf Imports a data file from url Example see func_misc qdf Returns the version number of the running Snapform application Designer Viewer Example see func_ident qdf Loads the text contents of url Example see func_misc qdf 4 256 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 6 Fig 4 167 Error list from Check form Chapter 4 Forms Development Integrity of the form One of the most important steps when finishing a form is to ensure its integrity That means that the form is in complete working order The first step is checking the form to find possible internal errors This is accomplished with the Check form function Toolbar or Tools menu Since it is possible to save a form and continue working with it even if there are erroneous expressions this test is important because it reveals such errors When errors are found the error list opens see Fig 4 167 Check results List of errors Page 1 Co
279. nd dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the text field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 55 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 55 Properties of a text field Value Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Text Field Property Value Name TxO00 Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder 10 Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 41 5761 Top 39 9457 Width 96 00 Height 12 00 Read only Single use Field Tooltip text Horizontal alignment Length Configure boxing Link ta object Only digits O OBIE The common properties of entry fields are described in section 4 4 2 1 The following properties are either specific for text fields or have additional information pertinent to the description of the common properties It is not possible to enter HTML formatted text Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Length Configure boxing Fig 4 56 Configuration window for field boxing Boxing mode Chapter 4 Forms Development Maximum number of characters in the field When this number of character is reached any further entered characters are ignored No value or the value 0 mean that the field has no length limitation When filling in the form text that is too long i
280. nd has the meaning of false the equivalent of it is not so It appears as the result of a logical operator or as return value of a function Note This constant can also be written in lower case false pi Number This is the number Pi 4 which corresponds to the ratio between circumference and diameter of a circle Its value is 3 141592653589793 at the precision defined within Snapform Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 1 4 Type Description 5 1 5 Type Description Chapter 5 Expression language reference Number This is the number e the base of the natural logarithm Its value is 2 718281828459045 at the precision defined within Snapform null Symbol This is a symbol for non existing or illegal value such as the result of a division by 0 This constant is used internally in Snapform but it is not accessible in the Expression editor Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 2 5 2 1 Type Type of operands Description 5 2 2 Type Type of operands Description 5 2 3 Type Type of operands Chapter 5 Expression language reference Operators x y numeric string depending on operands x and y numeric or string Addition This operator adds the two operands and returns the result The result depends on the types of the operands If the operands are numeric coming from a numeric field for example they are added mathematically If they are strings coming fro
281. nd will be displayed literally When using an expression like http www snapform com it is possible to display a complete HTML page without the need for an entry in the Info text details property This page must however be pure HTML 3 2 compatible code Otherwise unexpected text may be displayed When this box is checked the infopoint field gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box 4 232 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Left Top Width Height Info text details Fig 4 159 Info text editing window Chapter 4 Forms Development X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the infopoint Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the infopoint Width of the bounding box of the infopoint Height of the bounding box of the infopoint This property specifies the text which gets displayed when the mouse cursor is moved over the infopoint This text can be either simple unformatted text or it can be formatted text in HTML form When this property is selected a button appears at the right side of the property field C
282. nds are normally comparison operations xORy Logical x and y boolean Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Description 5 2 15 Type Type of operands Description Chapter 5 Expression language reference Logical OR Compares the operands and returns the result if one of or both operands are TRUE the result is TRUE if both operands are FALSE the result is FALSE The operands are normally comparison operations NOT x Logical Boolean Logical inversion Inverts the value of the operand and returns the result If the operand is TRUE the result is FALSE if it is FALSE the result is TRUE This is a single operand operator Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 5 3 1 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 2 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference Functions Abs x Math function Calculates the absolute value of the argument x numeric any value numeric Returns the absolute value of the argument If it is greater than 0 the result is identical to the argument In the other case the result value is the multiplication of the argument with 1 which is the same as the argument without minus sign When the argument is not a number the result of the function is null Other Math functions see func_math1 qdf Acos x Math function Returns the Arccosine of the argument in degrees xX numeric
283. nstall either application launch the uninstaller This will remove all relevant components of that application Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 3 User Manual Using the Snapform Designer 3 Using the Snapform Designer 3 1 Starting and Exiting the Application 3 1 1 Starting the Application The Snapform Designer is started like any other application This means that it is started from either the Start menu Windows or the Dock Macintosh or by double clicking on the program icon or the icon of a file assigned with the Snapform Designer Note When the Snapform Viewer is also installed on the system it is possible that double clicking a file of the type qdf or qdft may open the Snapform Viewer depending on the file type associations In such a case the Snapform Designer can not be started by double clicking such a file icon While the application is starting up the start up screen Fig 3 1 appears Fig 3 1 Start up screen J z lt J HA gt SnapForm designer 6 1 Release 5 1 10 This copy is licensed to Prodok Engineering 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG www snapforms com Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 3 1 2 Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer The start up screen shows the versi
284. nt When this box is checked the according number is always treated as a negative number When this property has a value the entered value will be validated and accepted only when it is greater tha or equal to the specified minimum value see also the Attention line to Maximum value below When this property has a value the entered value will be validated and accepted only when it is smaller than or equal to the specified maximum value When the value is outside of the range specified by Minimum value and Maximum value a message appears which indicates the accepted range and the entered value gets discarded An empty field or a deleted entry will not be validated Attention When a minimum or maximum value has been specified itcan no longer be deleted it can be modified however With numeric fields various possibilities for segmenting boxing are available Normally the field gets segmented into individual boxes for each character This kind of boxed fields is also called comb fields Note Note that the segmenting boxing of fields is purely a matter of presentation The actual field value is not modified when the field gets boxed which becomes apparent in the way it shows when the field is active Clicking on for this property opens the configuration window see Fig 4 64 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 64 Configuration window for field boxing in numeric fields Boxing mode Fig 4 65 drop d
285. ntrol NrOO4 Wrong syntax in formula San Nr_Number Unable to parse Formula San Nr_Number Number of errors 1 Go to error In this example an error was found on page 1 in the number field wro004 The expression is wrong the function is not named san but Sin The line is selected and after clicking on Go to error the affected form element becomes active and the error can be fixed When this function doesn t show any more errors it means that the form works That doesn t mean the form works correctly because conceptional and logical errors cannot be found with this function The next step in checking the form is testing with data Test it using possible data entry values in order to verify the results Testing with impossible values and intentionally wrong values is just as important 4 257 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 7 4 7 1 Fig 4 168 The Stylesheet editor General settings tab Chapter 4 Forms Development Stylesheets Stylesheets control the appearance of form elements Among the features controlled are font type and font size background color and border appearance depending of the context of the functionality as well as the appearance of tables Stylesheets can be exported and imported so it is possible to create forms with a consistent appearance The stylesheets are stored within their form Every form carries its own stylesheets The stylesheets are edi
286. nts Active elements are elements of the form which are used as trigger for user actions but otherwise do not have any further significance for the form Typical active elements are buttons or links Snapform has two types of active elements which can be placed in a form Hyperlinks and Infopoints In addition a set of command buttons in the Snapform Viewer can be activated through the Form settings properties of the form Hyperlinks Hyperlinks are form elements which take the user to another place This may be either another form element or an Internet address may be called and be displayed using specific software web browser mail client Hyperlinks can be used to create an extensive reference and help system where information available in the Intranet or Internet can be referred to The Hyperlink tool creates an active area which is used as the starting point for the hyperlink After selecting the tool a cursor with a hyperlink in default size appears see Fig 4 150 Ee a Assigned to the Hyperlink tool is a hyperlink field 60 pt wide and 13 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters HI and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first hyperlink placed in a form has therefore the name m1000 In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 151 the first hyperlink of the form has been placed and then select
287. nts of the bounding box The position of the 4 109 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 89 Properties ofa radio button group Name Category Chapter 4 Forms Development rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the radio button container are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 89 Properties of Radio buttons group Property Value Mame RadioOO0 Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 46 3453 Top 30 3371 Width 96 00 Height 24 00 The name of the radio button group This name can be changed Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid 4 110 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Chapter 4 Forms Development Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cann
288. o any other web content Snapform forms are always a file download which means there are no further configuration changes necessary on the server side which is only true for deploying the forms for accepting filled out forms and data adaptations on the server side are necessary When the forms are to be deployed on media the procedure is straightforward as well Snapform forms are self contained files and can be copied to media or file servers like any other file Deployment of in house created Snapform forms is freely available and the distribution rights are granted with the Snapform Designer license Redistributing the Snapform Viewer for example on CD ROM is allowed but you must make sure the user is encouraged to download the newest version of the Snapform Viewer 4 283 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 10 Chapter 4 Forms Development Forms management Forms management is very important in fields which have to comply to extended requirements concerning security or traceability Proper version management is a necessity Version management is supported in Snapform with the Form ID in the General form settings see section 4 8 2 as well as the metadata see section 4 8 5 It is highly recommended that you set up a forms management program which complies to the requirements of your organization For the specification and implementation of a forms management system Ringler Informatik AG provides support and consul
289. odulo 10 which is not displayed in the clear For dimensions and placement of the PostNet code refer to the requirements by the USPS Valid characters 0123456789 Application mail sorting in the US 1D barcode examples The following examples show the various 1D barcodes with various options Some of the options are available for several different codes but are shown only with one code as an example The text fields below the according code symbol allow entering your own text Be aware of the allowed characters for the codes however Note t is possible that the barcodes are not displayed completely in the screen shots This effect has technical reasons and by increasing the zoom factor the bars appear correctly For a proper representation of the barcodes itis recommended that you print out the documents In the examples dummy data is used It is therefore possible that the actual values are illegal for the respective barcode and that there may be errors when scanning the codes The document code39_family qdf see Fig 4 105 Draft mode and Fig 4 106 viewed in the Snapform Viewer shows various 1D barcode examples from the Code 39 group Code 39 Code 39 Extended Code 93 Code 93 Extended After selecting the Field elements in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the expression if there is any
290. of the according field Expressions with a calculation always begin with an equal sign Functions It is possible that expressions or components of expressions occur in various fields In this case it is worthwhile to create functions which can be called by the expressions in the according fields This considerably reduces the effort to test and maintain the expressions and errors due to repeated writing the same code become nonexistent Functions are built exactly the same way as expressions and they can be used in the same way Functions can be considered to be abbreviations for components of expressions Functions are assembled in the Function editor see Fig 4 166 amp Edit function List of functions Formula L variables Operators Functions f Functions Allx y Al String manipulation page 1 x Strix Im_HeaderPagel Len x Titlel Left string count Lb004 a Right string count Lb003 x SubStr string start count Lb002 Instr string pattern start_position Loo TrimStx string Lb000 vil lt I gt Description check syntax _ Cancel The Function editor is identical to use as the expression editor The main difference is that there is an additional window Function list where the function names are listed 4 244 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 5 2 4 5 2 1 Str x Len x Left string count Chapter 4 Fo
291. of the form layer are elements whose tab order value is greater than 0 and can be changed This includes the Image element see section 4 3 5 4 Because the interactivity of this element is rarely used it has been assigned to the base layout On the other hand labels which are normally part of the base layout function as an expression container and are also considered to be part of the form layer The elements of the form layer can be saved on their own The file format uses the extension hdo In order to save the form layer select the option Snapform field layer hdo in the Save as dialog A saved field layer is loaded with the menu item File gt Open Field layer Labels and expression container Labels and expression containers are the same but named differently according to their use In earlier Snapform versions only labels were implemented to hold expressions In the current version expressions can be assigned to any element of the form and functions are valid for the whole document Because of this the purpose of labels as expression containers has only historical purposes Note t is recommended to overhaul forms using labels as expression containers and migrate to functions instead more about functions in section 4 5 1 2 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 2 4 4 2 1 Chapter 4 Forms Development Entry fields One of the fundamental purposes of a form is the data acquisition Data is normally acquire
292. ols the actions happening when the box is checked or unchecked is entered here The expression is evaluated when the state of the box is toggled as well as when the document opens and other expression evaluation processes are run When this box is checked the check box field gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the check box 4 106 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Top Width Height Read only Single use field Tooltip text Chapter 4 Forms Development Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the check box Width of the bounding box of the Check box element Height of the bounding box of the Check box element When this box is checked the check box is marked as read only and its content cannot be manually changed The value may still be changed as the result of an expression A read only check box is still part of the tab order and its assigned expressions are evaluated according to its state There is information which may no longer be modified after initially filling out
293. on When it is checked the mechanism is active otherwise all further settings of this dialog are ignored The Server details zone contains the information for the server request This is the URL which initiates the server request for release This is the string which the server must return to allow the release When this string is received from the server the form is released 4 278 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development In the Current status zone the options already set in the security settings see section 4 8 3 2 are repeated They can also be changed in this dialog In the Release status zone the options for the released state after the release are specified These options must be set in this dialog in addtion to these options there is a field Expiry date in which an expiration date for the released state can be specified see also section 4 84 1 4 8 7 Fonts The Fonts dialog see Fig 4 178 shows all the fonts used in the form or defined in the stylesheets of the form Fig 4 178 The Form settings Fonts window amp Form settings Please make sure you have the according distribution rights for these fonts List of fonts Form layer E SansSerif 8 Type True Type 8 SansSerif 10 Type True Type SansSerif 10 Type True Type i SansSerif 11 Type True Type 1 SansSerif 12 Type True Type gt 8 SansSerif 14 Type True Type i SansSerif 16 Type True Type RDF Metadat
294. on number the registration information and the manufacturer of the software When the application has fully loaded the workspace appears see section 3 2 1 When the start up process has completed an empty application window appears which is described below section 3 2 1 Exiting the Application The application is normally exiting using the menu item File gt Quit Windows Snapform Designer gt Quit Macintosh If there are unsaved documents a popup will ask whether you want to save them The application can also be exited using a keyboard shortcut lt Alt gt lt F4 gt on Windows lt Ctrl gt lt Q gt on Macintosh or the closing boxes Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 3 2 3 2 1 Fig 3 2 Empty Application window Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Components of The Snapform Designer The Application Window The empty application window is shown in Fig 3 2 File Edit Format Controls view Tools Help AOBA J mlin e BBX nale T 2 41 F A 3 E E a 9 m a Bi Bl p al al a B jx m m E m 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The application window consists of the following areas Properties window Tools window 1 Menu bar and menus 2 Toolbar 3 Controls bar 4 Workspace 5 6 These components are explained in the following sections Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 3 2 2 Fig 3 3 The menu bar oft
295. onfigurate is selected the next larger symbol is selected with increasing amount of data When it is not selected the QRCode barcode field is displayed as a grey area when the amount of data is too big When this box is checked the QRCode barcode field will select automatically the next larger symbol with increasing amount of data The symbol grows accordingly or the module size shrinks if the Stretch content option is active Default for this property is unchecked 4 191 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual FNC 1 Module size Enable structured append Chapter 4 Forms Development The QRCode barcode has a special control character FNC1 which can be used for particular purposes It is either at the first or the second position of the data stream When this property is selected a drop down menu opens with the options No 1 and 2 Default value is No The option No means that no FNC1 character is used The option 1 means that the FNC1 character is at the first position in the data stream which means that the encoded data is formatted according to the UCC EAN Application Identifiers standards The option 2 means that the FNC1 character is at the second position in the data stream which means that the data is formatted according to separately specified standards which are registered at AIM International This is the size of a module the smallest unit of the QRCode barcode Measuring unit is Point and the default value is
296. operty is selected a drop down list containing all the elements of the form layer all elements with a taborder value greater than 0 including Image fields which can be selected When the form is filled out a green arrow mark appears at the right of the field see also Fig 4 52 Clicking on this icon sets the focus to that referenced field A selection list can also be dynamically assembled with an expression The function used for this purpose is called setnist and is explained in section 4 5 2 9 4 124 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 5 4 4 5 1 Fig 4 101 7D Barcode cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development 1D Barcodes 1D barcodes allow encoding of small amounts of data as a barcode which allows paper based workflows to be supported electronically The amount of encodable data is however small depending on the system up to 40 characters This is the reason why 1D barcodes are not suitable for transporting payload data However 1D barcodes are ideal for encoding data about the document identification routing information case identifier etc to be used in archival or storage systems The choice of the right 1D barcode system depends on various aspects such as character set data length readability legal requirements or available infrastructure and must be considered in the analysis process In this section there will be no in depth description of the actual barcode systems Instead of that refer to t
297. orm Designer covers qdf Form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help oe 2 1 1 BB Ranawie R e Value croo2 Arial 10 556 0735 290 00 21 3559 181 0909 Controls Tools Find amp replace Form Page 1 BB croco Tab BB croo1 Tab T Jcroo2 Tab BB coos Tab LO reo01 Tab BB cro04 Tab Lb000 Tab El vboo1 Tab Ey tbong Tab E b003 Tab Lb004 Tab Ey Lboos Tab 1 re E al VI milk a wl a l a e B je RE mi 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG Cr000 Default cover 60 pt wide 12 pt high black Cr001 Cover rectangular 21 35 pt wide 120 pt high black Cr002 Cover rectangular 21 35 pt wide 181 1 pt high white Cr003 Cover oval bounding box 115 9 pt wide 99 6 pt high light grey 5 Rc001 Rectangle 114 9 pt wide 51 2 pt high border width 4 pt black 6 Cr004 Cover rectangular 53 9 pt wide 66 pt high blue AU Nc Items 4 5 and 6 elements croo3 Re001 and croo4 demonstrate the overlapping behavior Element croo3 is below element croo4 because the latter was added later Element Re001 was added after element cr003 but before element croo4 Because Covers are always at the bottom
298. orm Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference tbl_end String marking the end of the table row_start String to mark the beginning of a table row row_end String to mark the end of a table row delimiter String to separate the field values within a table row column repeatable Column number or column name in the table String with a structure defined by the function arguments This function is used to export the contents of a table for data transfers or for the preparation of a 2D barcode The possibility to define strings marking the beginning and end of the table and of table rows also allows to export the table in an XML format The markers and the delimiter may consist of one or several characters It is also possible to use an empty string or no character at all Quotes and the backslash character must be escaped with the Backslash character When specifying a new line character for example for row_end the sequence n must be entered The columns can be in any selectable order It is even possible to repeat columns This function does not return column sums These must be added separately Total table column StrTotal table column TimeTotal table column see func_table1 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 3 78 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression l
299. orms Development Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence which is logical because the barcode is not an active element When the box is checked the QRCode barcode field will be printed When the box is checked the QRCode barcode field is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated in QRCode barcode fields and cannot be changed In this property of the QRCode barcode field the text to be encoded is entered Clicking on this property field opens the expression editor In most of the cases the value is the result of a calculation When this box is checked the QRCode barcode field gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box 4 188 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Left Top Width Height Title Transparent Back color Barcode colo
300. orrection level Rune 0 255 Read initialization Process tilde Struct 4ppend Str Append count Str Append index Str Append FileID Value Badd Default 10 af S034 30 3371 96 00 96 00 Mormal Full 2 23 1 Chapter 4 Forms Development The name of the Aztec barcode field in the document This name can be changed 4 155 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Chapter 4 Forms Development Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence which is logical because the barcode is not an active element When the box is checked the Aztec barcode field will be printed When the box is checked the Aztec barcode field is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated in Aztec barcode fields and cannot be changed In this property of the Aztec barcode field the text to be encoded is entered Clicking on this property field
301. ot This option is useful with forms without background image because otherwise it is not possible to recognize a check box on the printout In many forms applications there are references to other sections of the form or to additional information With the Link to object property it is possible to create such a reference in a Snapform form When this property is selected a drop down list containing all the elements of the form layer all elements with a taborder value greater than 0 including Image fields which can be selected When the form is filled out a green arrow mark appears at the right of the field see also Fig 4 52 Clicking on this icon sets the focus to that referenced field As described in section 4 3 6 1 it is possible to link a label with a check box which then allows the check box to be toggled by clicking on the label Radio buttons In order to implement radio buttons there must be a way to logically group check boxes so that they will be mutualy exclusive The Snapform tool to achieve this is the Radio button container The Radio button group container is a field which makes any check box newly created and placed within its perimeter into a part of the set of radio buttons In the object structure these check boxes are one level below the other fields The Radio button group does not quite belong to the form level because it is not part of the tab order Taborder value 1 Outside of the Draft mode it
302. ot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence This check box is unchecked and cannot be changed Radio button containers are never printed When the box is checked the radio button container is displayed on screen When this box is checked at least one check box belonging to the radio button group must have been checked or unchecked at least once in order for the form to be valid more about validity of forms in section 4 8 4 2 It is possible to specify a constant value for an radio button group but this does not make much sense Instead the expression which controls the actions happening when switching between the check boxes within the radio button container is entered here The expression is evaluated when the state of a check box in the radio button group is toggled as well as when the document opens and other expression evaluation processes are run When this box is checked the radio button container and all its contained check boxes get locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive also for the check boxes within the container Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box 4 111 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Left Top Width Height 4 4 3 3 Fig 4 90 Placing a check box in an radio button container Chapter 4 Forms Development X
303. ount number Account type Balance LHR j a a 4 Number Item Unit price Units Amount T at z in stock 2 at z in stock BOS 3 at z in stock SFO Number of units Total 4 219 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 147 Examples from tables qdf in the Snapform Viewer filled out Chapter 4 Forms Development Normal table fixed number of rows Table with variable number of rows and 3 displayable rows Phantom table with one single displayed row Table with variable number of rows several visual rows per logical row Totals below the table 5 Table with variable number of rows vertical logical rows KRWN In Fig 4 147 the same form is shown but with filled out table fields AAA tabellen qdf Snapform Viewer HA SR o i liD S Tables various examples 1 Storage Unit In Out 5 1 First floor 23 232 Units 19 823 aoe l Em ma 2 Second floor 3 432 Units 2 532 a 3 Shed 44 Units ZRH 07 00 07 10 09 05 2 Name First name Date of birth Membership 08 15 r illi HJFRA 3 Tell William 18 10 1263 X Yes No 09 55 4 Dupont Ren 05 04 2003 Yes No 5 Dupond Roland 05 04 2003 Yes X No uc iM 15 50 08 05 3 Account number Account type Balance LHR 10 05 See listing B 35 735 IAD 4 Number Item Unit price Units Amount 2 45 yellow parrots at 56 234 kg 2 530 55 a pn b ORD in stock 3 2 342 rusty nails at 3 45 kg 8 079
304. ow displays information about the features of that rectangle Note The behavior of dashed lines can be verified best in Snapform Designer with this sample file by selecting items 6 or 12 and then changing their size Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 29 Sample rectangles from rectangles qaf Chapter 4 Forms Development e ee rectangles qdf Snapform Viewer D au Cae Penge Rc000 Default rectangle 60 pt wide 12 pt high border width 1 pt black Rc001 Rectangle 60 pt wide 12 pt high border width 1 pt red Rc002 Square rectangle 40 pt wide 40 pt high border width 1 pt black Rc003 Rectangle 60 pt wide 12 pt high border width 3 pt black Rc004 Square rectangle 12 pt wide 12 pt high border width 6 pt black Rc005 Rectangle 60 pt wide 24 pt high border width 3 pt black dash size 3 pt Rc007 Rectangle 60 pt wide 24 pt high border width 15 pt black dash size 0 5 pt Rc008 Oval based on default rectangle bounding box 60 pt wide 12 pt high border width 1 pt black Rc009 Circle oval bounding box 40 pt wide 40 pt high border width 1 pt black Rc010 Circle oval bounding box 30 pt wide 30 pt high border width 5 pt black Rc011 Circle oval bounding box 12 pt wide 12 pt high border width 7 pt black Rc012 Oval bounding box 60 pt wide 84 75 pt high border width 5 pt black dash size 5 pt Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 5 3
305. own menu for field boxing types in numeric fields No boxing Only 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development Configure boxing Boxing mode Distance between boxes 1 50 Width of boxes The configuration window for field boxing allows you to set the following properties This drop down menu controls the boxing types of the field see Fig 4 65 No boxing This is the default and the field will not be boxed The fields for Distance between boxes and Width of boxes are not active This boxing type separates the number in a block before the decimal sign and a block after the decimal sign The decimal sign itself is not displayed Note This boxing type has specifically been created for currency amounts where a non specified number of digits before and exactly two digits after the decimal sign are displayed In addition unless the rounding is set to 05 rounding to 01 is used even if another rounding is set or none at all Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 66 Configuration window for field boxing in numeric fields with the Only 2 boxing type Each digit Digits and sign Distance between boxes Width of boxes Chapter 4 Forms Development Selecting this boxing type changes the configuration window see Fig 4 66 gt Configure boxing Boxing mode Distance between boxes 1 50 width oF boxes For further explanations see below With this setting the field behaves like a normal comb
306. pages will display the report The first property of the report is the title which is entered in the Header text property Further entries are in the Configure table window see Fig 4 136 In the report specification table the values for the column width should be verified In an unmodified table the values of the width of the column fields are used This means that the columns of the report are proportionally the same width as the columns in the form It may be useful in certain cases to modify the column widths in the report for example the width of the label inserted to control the selector 4 212 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development In any case column headers should be entered While these headers are present in the form they must be explicitly specified for the report in the Header column The Show total check box may be checked In this case and if the field type of the column allows it the total of the values of the column is calculated and displayed below the report table Whether this is desirable depends on the actual use of the table The Column for message should whenever possible be specified Otherwise there will be no reference to the report page in the form Note that it does not matter for the Print preview if the field of the column is able to display the see listing text meaning that date or number fields do work The field must be wide enough to display the whole te
307. pecify in advance the file name for the retrieved chained data That file name is specified in this property This property is normally deactivated It gets activated when the Struct Append property is activated It is however optional and only needed when required by the actual application The document aztec gdf see Fig 4 115 Draft mode and Fig 4 116 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows various examples of Aztec barcodes After selecting the barcode fields in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties 4 161 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the expression if there is any Fig 4 115 Examples of Aztec x barcodes from Draft Preview aztec qdf in Draft x mode a 0 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 1 etd 60 2D Barcodes Aztec Code Enter text in this field Sep 828 8 B BS Fig 4 116 Examples of Aztec e608 aztec qdf Snapform Viewer barcodes from DS In rn 180K Sy aztec qdf in the 6 i Snapform Viewer 2D Barcodes Aztec Code Enter text in this field The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog who thinks he is an Aztec 1 1 4 162 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 6 3 Chapter 4 Forms Development 1 Bca000 Aztec barcode Configuration type Full Stretch content on
308. pens the expression editor to enter the expression All field objects and functions are available in the expression editor Server side interaction Snapform provides the possibility to change the rights of a form see section 4 8 3 2 using a server side command This feature is called release Possible applications are for example to protect the form after it has been eFiled or releasing additional functions after the clearance from a payment system The server side interaction involves calling a specific URL which returns a particular string When this string corresponds to the specified release string the release action occurs otherwise nothing happens unless the result is evaluated in an expression which returns a message to the user 4 277 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 177 The Form settings Serverside interaction window This form requires an interaction with the server Start URL Release string Chapter 4 Forms Development Note The term release means a change of the state of the form which is initiated by an interaction with the server It does not necessarily mean that the form has more rights than before The Serverside interaction dialog see Fig 4 177 contains the information needed for the communication with the server amp Form settings Serverside Interaction This Form requires an interaction with a server a l g a Server details S
309. pform PDF converter Ringler Informatik AG offers a conversion Service The converter is explained in detail in section 4 3 2 Snapform Designer The Snapform Designer is the development tool for Snapform forms This application is based on the Java Runtime Engine and is available for Microsoft Windows and the Apple Mac OS X This manual describes the functionality of the Snapform Designer Snapform Viewer The Snapform Viewer is the client component for Snapform forms and can be downloaded free from the Snapform web site It is based on the Java Runtime Engine and is available for Windows Macintosh and various Unix Linux variants The use of the Snapform Viewer is self explanatory Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 1 3 4 1 3 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Workflow and Management Tools The Workflow and Management Tools extend Snapform to a complete eForms solution and allow a centralized data management as well as a centrally controlled security policy for the forms and their data The Workflow and Management Tools are not covered by this manual For further information contact Ringler Informatik AG API and SDK For Snapform based applications an API with an according SDK exists These components are not covered in this manual For further information contact Ringler Informatik AG Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 1 4 1 4 1 Chapter 1 Introduction The QDF Document Format General Snapform s docum
310. played when the blank form is opened and it can be overwritten when filling out the form A simple value looks in the expression editor like this This is the default value Resetting the form Clear entries button in the Snapform Viewer redisplays the default value A default value specified as an expression Default value as expression is displayed as such when opening the document When it is overwritten as the form is filled out the field will be marked as Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Locked Left Top Width Height Read only Chapter 4 Forms Development calculated field overwritten When the form is reset the field is cleared but it will remain marked as overwritten Only after clicking the field s reset icon the default value is shown again Note Entry fields do not support text in HTML form An expression is executed when the document is opened and when form actions are run When the field is not write protected the field value can be overwritten The field will however be marked as overwritten When this box is checked the entry field gets locked in the Snapform Designer and cannot be accidentally moved In addition all other properties in the Properties dialog are made inactive Access to these properties is only available after deactivating this check box X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property
311. plays indicators for the error While it is possible to accept the erroneous expression it must be corrected at a later time The expressions can be tested in the Preview see section 3 3 2 However in order to be sure that the expressions work correctly they must be tested in the Snapform Viewer Other user interface components The Snapform Designer has other user interface elements which are used for various purposes Keyboard Shortcuts For experienced users keyboard shortcuts are an efficient way to speed up the work The Snapform Designer supports keyboard shortcuts The key combinations are indicated in their appropriate menu item Color picker Some field properties consist of color In order to select a color the Snapform Designer has a color selection mechanism which uses the color selection window see Fig 3 29 To select a color three different color models are available In the Swatches view see Fig 3 29 the color is selected from a palette of so called web safe colors In the HSB view see Fig 3 30 the HSB color model is used to select and define a color and in the RGB view see Fig 3 31 the RGB values of the colors are specified Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 3 User Manual Using the Snapform Designer Fig 3 29 Color picking window with Swatches Pick a color Swatches HSB RGB Recent m A a a a a a Preview Oo oO E Sample Text Sample Text o E oO Sample Text Sample Text OK
312. preferably imported in the TIFF or PNG format Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 5 4 3 5 1 Fig 4 20 Line tool cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development Graphical elements Snapform has four graphical elements lines rectangles cover areas and images The graphical elements are considered to be part of the base layout They are part of the form structure and therefore independent from background images Lines The Line tool 7 creates simple straight lines After selecting the tool a cursor with a horizontal line appears see Fig 4 20 5 Associated with the Line tool is a black horizontal line 1 pt wide and 60 pt long Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace The line automatically gets a default name consisting of the characters Ln and a consecutive three digit number beginning with 000 The first line placed in a form has therefore the name nooo In the object structure itis added to the according page In Fig 4 21 the first line of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 21 Newly created line Snapform Designer New form Fie Edit Format Controls View Tools Help alimi WE 10 D gt XBX aas T7 i Property Name Category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left lro Width Height Color Line width Direction Dash size Honor border width Draws right to left Chapter 4 Fo
313. pt wide and 48 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Bed and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first Datamatrix barcode field placed in a form has therefore the name Bedooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 123 the first Datamatrix barcode field of the form has been placed and then selected 4 175 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 123 Newly created n Snapform Designer New form Datamatr IX Fie Edit Format Controls View Tools Help aoma g ea Oo o AnA aaa la barcode field Property value Name Bcd000 Category A Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable O 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 42 1 1 1 1 60 6742 35 3933 48 00 48 00 Transparent Back color Barcode color i Encoding Format Module size 2 Process tilde WBHBHBBe Ss HBOBAN Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form gage Page 1 eS EE a g 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the Datamatrix barcode field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point t
314. que identification string which can be linked with a print job The length of this string is controlled with the argument length The argument digits defines whether the string should contain number only getPrintID createGUID getSessionID getDatalD getRandomString length digits see func_ident qdf getRandomString length digits Identifier function Creates a randomly assembled string of the length length length length of the string to be created positive integer digits optional indicator whether the string should consist of numbers only boolean FALSE when not specified String alphanumeric or numeric depending on the value of the argument digits Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Explanation See also Example 5 3 39 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 40 Category Chapter 5 Expression language reference Creates a randomly assembled string The length of the string is controlled with the argument length The argument digits defines whether the string contains numbers only This function can also be used when the value of digits TRUE to create a random number getPrintidStr length digits createGUID getSessionID getPrintID getDatalD see func_ident qdf getRow Table function Shows the row number of the according field in the respective table This function has no arguments numeric integer R
315. r Chapter 4 Forms Development X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the QRCode barcode field Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the QRCode barcode field Width of the bounding box of the QRCode barcode field Height of the bounding box of the QRCode barcode field This is a line of text which is placed above the QRCode barcode field This title may for example contain information for the operator who manually scans in the code The title may be either simple text or entered in HTML form It is of fixed font size 10 pt and its length is limited to the width of the QRCode barcode field The background of the QRCode barcode is set to transparent no covering background color with this check box This property is unchecked by default Background color of the QRCode barcode field By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color The background color is only applied when the Transparent check box is unchecked Color of the barcode By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color 4 189 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Stretch content Encoding Byte Numeric Chapter 4 Fo
316. r Manual Explanation See also Example 5 3 9 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 10 Category Short description Arguments Expression language reference Returns the Arcsine of the argument in degrees When the argument is greater than 1 or smaller than 1 the calculation is not possible and a special icon is shown in the field showing the result Sin x Acos x Atan x Cos x Tan x other Math functions see func_math2 qdf Atan x Math function Returns the Arctangent of the argument in degrees x numeric any value numeric is between 90 and 90 Returns the Arctangent of the argument in degrees Tan x Acos x Asin x Cos x Sin x other Math functions see func_math2 qdf calcDays date_first date_second Date function Calculates the number of days between the entered dates date _first valid date Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 11 Category Short description Arguments Result Chapter 5 Expression language reference date_second valid date numeric integer Returns the number of days between the two dates date_first and date_second The entered values can be either in the future or the past A positive result means that date_second is later than date_first a negative result means that date_second is earlier than date_first For calculations with
317. r the amount of rows padding characters are added until the required number of rows is reached The smallest value for this property is 3 and the value should not be higher than 90 to make sure that the symbol can be properly read When the value is set to 0 as many rows are created as are necessary to display the data The barcode can be rotated by multiples of 90 Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu with the selection of the rotation angles 0 90 180 270 The default value is 0 This is the level of the error correction The entered value may be an integer between O no error correction and 8 maximum error correction level This value also determines the amount of payload data which may be encoded in the symbol In order to encode the maximum amount of data it is compressed The PDF 417 barcode has three compression schemes which are optimized for specific kind of data numbers text and binary The highest compression can be achieved when only numbers are compressed the lowest degree will be for binary data When this property is selected a drop down menu pens with the options Binary Text and Numeric Default setting is Text This corresponds to the above mentioned compression methods For a more in depth description of the compression methods in the PDF 417 barcode refer to the literature 4 170 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Part of macro Macro ID Macro units count Chapter 4
318. r when the element has the focus is active for entering information This is for example the case when the field has been tabbed into Border width sets the width of the border in Points Default value is 1 When the check box Border fading is active the border color fades in and out when mouse enters and exits the field 4 260 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 169 The Stylesheet amp Stylesheet editor editor Input eE ae 1 a General settings Input controls amp labels Infopoint and hyperlinks Tables 2 Default 9 controls and labels SEE STUER Sian 4 Default 11 p 5 Default 12 Background color vn Alpha 255 ta b 6 Default 14 o 7 Default 16 Tet cor ET 8 Default 18 9 Default 8 Bold Calculated field 10 Default 9 Bold ome 1 11 Default 10 Bold Background color Alphas 255 12 Default 11 Bold 13 Default 12 Bold Text color NG sche 255 14 Default 14 Bold p as Daak ie ball Calculated field overwritten 16 Default 18 Bold Background color Gy Alpha 255 17 Default 8 Italic 18 Default 9 Ia Tet cor I acho i Read only field Background color va Alpha 2s Alpha 255 23 Default 16 Italic Selection Background color TT Alpha Jes Text color vn Alpha g 255 Negative numbers Background color vn Alpha 0 255 Texto IN acho J Required fields Use icons to mark required fields ise bac
319. ransferred when leaving the field Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 6 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development and it is displayed in boldface 3 Lb001 Label text in HTML aligned to the top border of the field background color green to visualize the field size non transparent 4 Lb002 Label text in HTML aligned to the center of the field background color green to visualize the field size non transparent 5 Lb003 Label text in HTML aligned to the bottom border of the field background color green to visualize the field size non transparent 6 Lb004 Label text in HTML with various changing in line text attributes 7 Lb005 Label text in HTML with Heading levels horizontal separator line and centered text 8 Lb006 Label text in HTML with lists tables and embedded image HTML tags and attribute usable in Snapform Snapform supports tags and attributes which are defined in the HTML 3 2 standard Newer features are not supported Such code may either be displayed as code or not at all The official HTML specification can be found at http www w3c org TR REC html32 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 4 4 1 Chapter 4 Forms Development Form layer One level above the base layout is the form layer The form layer consists of active elements which means that these elements react to user interaction such as a value can be entered into a field or that a box can be checked In very simple words part
320. re Security In the Security dialog see Fig 4 173 the document settings which relate to security or permissions of the form are displayed This includes access to the document and the usage rights 4 268 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 173 The Form settings Security window 4 8 3 1 Viewer password Designer password Chapter 4 Forms Development amp Form settings Passwords Viewer password Designer password Options 7 Allow to change Allow binary export Allow binary import Allow to print incomplete form Allow to print invalid Form Import compatible data only Allow to print Allow to print values only Allow to save Allow XML Export Allow XML Import Allow saving to QDF S format V Allow saving to QDF A format Allow eSignature v a a 7 Allow to save as 7 z a Allow eFiling Allow eFiling incomplete form QECECECECECECQEQIC Allow eFiling invalid form Command buttons 7 Clear entries 7 Import data 7 verify iy Pri 7 Export data 7 Sign v 7 Save As Cancel The Security dialog is subdivided into three areas Passwords Options and Command buttons Passwords The document can be protected with two types of passwords The entry of these values into the correspondin
321. rectangle Width of the bounding box of the Rectangle element Height of the bounding box of the Rectangle element Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Color Line width Is oval Dash size Chapter 4 Forms Development Note The dimensions of the rectangle are measured on its outside if several rectangles are placed to form a table the line width must be taken into account Color of the rectangle By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color Width of the border of the Rectangle element in Points The line width is measured from the bounding box inward Helpful Hint Rectangles which are narrower than their line width may not be shown correctly When this box is checked an ellipse limited by the bounding box of the element is displayed instead of a rectangle This value determines whether the rectangle is displayed whole or dashed The value 0 means that the line is displayed whole Other values indicate that the line is displayed dashed where the value is the length of the dash With rectangles the dashing starts at the upper left corner and runs clockwise With ellipses the dashing starts at the contact point with the right hand side of the bounding box 3 o clock position and runs clockwise The document rectangles gdf see Fig 4 29 shows various examples of Rectangles After selecting a rectangle in the Snapform Designer the properties wind
322. red value to the next greater integer Example see func_math1 qdf Rounds the entered value to the next smaller integer Example see func_math1 qdf Rounds the absolute value of the entered value to the next smaller whole number Example see func_math1 qdf 4 248 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Cover x Exp x Log x Sqrt x IncVersion initial_ valu e step 4 5 2 4 Total table column StrTotal table column Chapter 4 Forms Development Rounds the absolute value of the entered value to the next greater integer Example see func_math1 qdf Calculates the value of the exponential function ex Example see func_math2 qdf Calculates the Natural Logarithm of x In x Example see func_math2 qdf Calculates the square root of the entered value Example see func_math2 qdf Loop counter sets a counter to inital_value and increments it with each subsequent call by step Example see func_math1 qdf Table functions Table functions are applied on tables and are mainly used for accessing the table data The following functions are part of the group of table functions Sums up the values of the column column Example see func_table1 qaf Assembles the table values of column column to a string Example see func_table1 qaf 4 249 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual TimeTotal table column Cell table column row TblValues table tbl_start tbl_end row_ start row_end delimit
323. res of the password field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 81 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 81 Properties ofa Chapter 4 Forms Development password field Properties of Password Field Property Value Name Pwd Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder 10 Frintable visible Required Value Locked Left 45 6522 Top 46 4674 Widkh 96 00 Height 12 00 Tooltip text Link to object The common properties of entry fields are described in section 4 4 2 1 The following properties are either specific for password fields or have additional information pertinent added to the description of the common properties Stylesheet Formatting and presentation of the entry and the appearance of the field is controlled via the stylesheet see section 4 7 1 Printable A password field is not printable and cannot be made printable Value It is possible to specify a default value but this does not make much sense as it is displayed as a series of dots However a validation expression can be assigned to the field 4 100 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 2 8 Fig 4 82 Examples of entry fields of entryfields qdf in Draft mode Chapter 4 Forms Development Examples of entry fields The document entryfields gdf see Fig 4 82 Draft mode and Fig 4 83 shown in the Snapform Viewer filled out contains various examples of entry fields as described in the previous section After selecting the Field el
324. right top aligned Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form Page 1 i EE B ES ja E a 3 fhi g E E 2 g 7 a El a 30 y 400 4 420 40 4 E 400 4 SRCE 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the width of the infopoint can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the infopoint are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 158 4 230 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 158 Properties ofan infopoint Name Category Stylesheet Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Info point Property Value Name Ipooo Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 41 2921 Top 36 236 Width 12 00 Height 12 00 Info text details Text position Position right top aligned Name of the infopoint field in the document This name can be changed Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23
325. rinting or in the Print preview which contain all table values in a simple tabular form This table is called 4 202 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Row height Selector distance Scrollbar distance Chapter 4 Forms Development report The layout of this table is specified in the Configure table property This property specifies the height of the logical row of the table This value sets the distance in direction of the column between two corresponding fields in logical rows Normally this is the distance between the visual rows Measuring unit is Points and the default value is 15 which matches well the default value of the height of entry fields Helpful Hint n order to prevent overlaps when the table is displayed this value may need to be adjusted As a rule of thumb Height of the bounding box around all fields of a logical row plus 3 Points is a useful value When all fields are properly aligned on a horizontal line this also means Height of the tallest field in the row plus 3 Point Note When the property Horizontal row direction is unchecked this value must be verified In order to prevent overlapping the above rule of thumb has to be applied to the field width The selector see Fig 4 132 is used to mark and select logical rows It is displayed automatically at the left or above the logical row outside of the perimeter of the table container This property controls the distance betwee
326. rithm used for this purpose ensures that this string is unique world wide compared with other strings created in the same way getRandomString length digits getSessionID getPrintID getDatalD getPrintldStr length digits see func_ident qdf Date year month day Date function Creates a date object from the arguments year Whole positive number corresponding to a year number month Whole positive number corresponding to a month number day Whole positive number corresponding to a day number 5 27 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 23 Category Short description Arguments Result Chapter 5 Expression language reference Date Creates a date from the three arguments The value for year must consist of four digits for current dates entering a two digit number leads to dates in the Roman era The value for month should be between 1 and 12 Greater values are converted and the year number increased accordingly Example corresponds to March of the following year The value for day should be between 1 and 28 to 31 depending on the value for month Greater values are converted and accordingly added to the month and year values example the 35th of May corresponds to the 4th of June The entries should be integers however any digits after the decimal sign will be ignored getDay date_value getMonth date_value getYear date_
327. rms Development Clicking on Add adds a function name to the list As this default function name is not very self explanatory it should be changed to something more suitable for its use Then the function can be edited when it is selected in the List of functions Clicking on Delete removes the selected function from the list Note that a deleted function is no longer available and it is possible that expressions in the form may no longer work properly because they reference the deleted function Actions and logic available in Snapform The available functions are grouped according to their purpose The following sections represent the grouping in the expression editor Chapter 5 Expression language reference lists the functions in alphabetical order String functions String functions are applied to character strings Every element can be converted to a string so that these functions have a wide range of use The following functions are part of the group of string functions Converts the entered value to a string Example see func_string1 qdf Returns the length number of characters of the string Example see func_string1 qdf Returns the first count characters counted from left of the string string Example see func_string1 qdf 4 245 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Right string count SubStr string start count InStr string pattern start_position TrimStr string SubArray byte_array
328. rms Development Note Standards for the QRCode barcode may contain requirements concerning the colors to be used and should be referred to Also note that only the full colors Black Cyan Magenta and Yellow are printed as full color unless specific spot colors are used and that good printing quality can be achieved only with these colors at 100 saturation as there will not be screened modules This check box determines whether the symbol is scaled to the size of the QRCode barcode field When the box is checked the symbol is scaled to fit into the field perimeter The value for the Module size property is in this case overridden When the box is unchecked the symbol is displayed using the specified module size and it is aligned to the top left corner the field Attention When this property is active the symbol may be scaled down so far with greater amount of data that it cannot be printed out properly anymore and the resulting module size will be too small Note When this property is not active the symbol may grow beyond the field s size and cover other elements of the document This property specifies the method which is used to encode the data stream for the symbol When selecting this property a drop down menu opens with the options Auto Byte Numeric Alphanumeric and Kanji Auto is the default With the Auto setting the most suitable encoding method for the given data stream will be used The settings have the following m
329. rms Development kk FO Value Ln000 Default 10 57 00 44 25 60 00 1 00 1 00 Horizontal 0 00 o Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace B C a i E al B E OG g l2 a g aj Be EH lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG The length and the position of the line can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the line can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow Note that the direction of the line does not change even when the bounding box is increased perpendicular to the line the line remains centered bounding box to the middle of the The other features of the line are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 22 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 22 Properties ofa line Properties of Line Property Value Name Lndood Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 57 00 Top 44 25 Width 60 00 Height 1 00 Color C Line width 1 00 Direction Horizontal Dash size 0 00 Honor border width oO Draws right to left
330. rner of the bounding box of the element measured in Points This property allows precise numeric positioning of the Cover Width of the bounding box of the Cover element Height of the bounding box of the Cover element When this box is checked an oval ellipse limited by the bounding box of the element is displayed instead of a rectangle Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Back color Fig 4 33 Sample Cover elements in covers qdf Chapter 4 Forms Development Color of the cover By clicking on this property the color picker opens see section 3 2 9 2 which allows to specify the color The document covers gdf see Fig 4 33 shows various examples of Covers After selecting a cover in the Snapform Designer the properties window displays information about the features of that cover re 0e covers qdf Snapform Viewer PE a m 1120 Department of the Treasury OMB No 1545 0123 U S Corporation Income Tax Return For calendar year 2006 or tax year beginning 2006 ending 20 gt See Internal Revenue Service 77 separate instructions A Check i Nama B Employer identification number 1 Consolidated retum attach Form 851 2 Personal holding co Number street and room or suite no If a P O box see instructions Date incorporated
331. rom the entered string and returns the trimmed string When the string does not have any preceding or trailing spaces the result is identical with the entered string This function is particularly useful when preparing data for 2D barcodes SubStr string start count InStr string pattern start_position see func_string2 qdf Trunc x Math function Rounds the absolute value of the entered value to the next smaller whole number x numeric any value numeric Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference Returns without consideration of a minus sign the entered value rounded down to the next smaller whole number This function corresponds to the equation Trunc x x Floor x a Abs x This function is therefore for positive numbers identical with Floor x for negative numbers the returned value differs from the result of Floor x by 1 Floor x Round x Ceil x Cover x see func_math1 qdf Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 5 4 5 4 1 Chapter 5 Expression language reference Regular Expressions Regular Expressions are a very powerful tool to evaluate strings They allow finding of patterns which follow certain rules They also allow replacing the matches with other strings which makes them a very powerful Search and Replace function The following table is based on the software development documentation and contains
332. roperty Name Category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Title Transparent Back color Barcode color Stretch content Encoding Config type Module size Error correction level Rune 0 255 Read initialization Process tilde Struct Append Str Append count Str Append index Str Append FileID Chapter 4 Forms Development Value Bca000 Default 10 Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace S Forr The length and the width of the Aztec barcode field can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the Aztec barcode field are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 114 4 154 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 114 Properties ofan Aztec barcode field Name Properties of Aztec barcode Property Name Category Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Title Transparent Back color Barcode color Stretch content Encoding Config type Module size Error c
333. rsection a to z except b and c ad z Subtraction a to z but not m to p a 1q z Subtraction Pre defined character groups Any character with or without end of line A number 0 9 Not a number 0 9 A Whitespace character t n xoB f r Not a Whitespace character s A Word character a zA 2 0 9 Not a word character w POSIX charactergroups for US ASCII only A lower case letter a z An upper case letter A Z Any ASCII value x00 x7F A letter p Lower p Upper A number 0 9 An alphanumeric character p Alpha p Digit A Punctuation amp lt gt _ A visible character p Alnum p Punct A printable character p Graph Space or Tab character t A Control character x00 x1F x7F A Hexadecimal character 0 9a fA F A Whitespace character t n x0B f rl Character groups for Unicode blocks and categories p InGreek p Lu pt Sc P InGreek p Li amp amp p Lu A character from the Greek block simple block An upper case letter simple category A currency symbol A character outside of the Greek block Negation Any character except upper case letter Subtraction Delimiters Begin of a line End of aline Word delimiter Not a word delimiter Begin of input End of previous match End of input except the last end character if present End of input Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual n Chapter 5 Expression language re
334. rties window see Fig 4 62 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 62 Properties ofa numeric field Stylesheet Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Numeric Field Property Value Name rood Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder 10 Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left 47 2020 Top 44 0217 Width 96 00 Height 12 00 Read only Single use Field Tooltip text Horizontal alignment Right Length 0 Leading zeros Rounding No rounding Always negative Minimum value O OBIS Maximum value Configure boxing Link to object The common properties of entry fields are described in section 4 4 2 1 The following properties are either specific for numeric fields or have additional information pertinent to the description of the common properties Formatting and presentation of the numbers is controlled via the stylesheet see section 4 7 1 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Horizontal alignment Length Leading zeros Chapter 4 Forms Development Helpful Hint When unexpected results in the way the numbers are displayed are encountered verifying the stylesheet in the stylesheet editor may provide an explanation The horizontal alignment default setting is right This facilitates the presentation of numbers in a column Maximum number of characters in the field When this number of character is reached any further entered characters are ignored No value or the value 0 mean that the f
335. rty Value Mame Hiogg Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Hyperlink Locked Left 37 9213 Top 28 6517 Widkh 60 00 Height 13 00 Horizontal alignment Left Rotation angle ge Transparent Draw underline URL Link to object The name of the hyperlink in the document This name can be changed Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For hyperlinks the zones Font settings and Supplemental font support in the General 4 224 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Chapter 4 Forms Development settings tab as well as the Infopoint and hyperlinks tab of the stylesheet editor are of importance Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is 1 and cannot be changed This means that the element is not part of the tabbing sequence When the box is checked the hyperlink its text will be printed When the box is checked the hyperlink is displayed on screen This property is always deactivated and cannot be changed This is the text displayed in the hyper
336. s case the date belonging to the calculated time will be displayed addMinute time_value number calcHours date _first date_second getHour time_value Now other date and time functions see func_time qdf addMinute time_value number Date function Calculates the time which is from the time time_value apart by number of minutes time_value valid time number integer Time Returns the time which is by number of minutes apart from the entered time time_value The entered time can be in the future or the past A positive value for number means that the resulting time is in the relative future from the entered time and a negative number means that the resulting time is in the relative past from the entered time 5 14 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 6 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference For calculations from the current time it is possible to use as the value for time_value the function Now If the value for number has numbers after the decimal sign they will be ignored In this function only the minutes are added up the value for the hours will be calculated accordingly In order to display the result an accordingly formatted date field is necessary format HH mm It is possible to format the date field as a date format In this case the date belonging to the calculated time will be displayed
337. s displayed in a smaller font size and with condensed characters so that it completely fits into the field The consequence is that text can become unreadable rather quickly It is therefore important to estimate the text size when planning the form and to provide text fields with an appropriately sized data entry field Text fields are boxes into individual characters This kind of boxed fields is also called comb fields Clicking on for this property opens the field boxing configuration window see Fig 4 56 T Co nfigure boxing Ed Boxing mode Distance between boxes 1 50 Width of boxes The configuration window for field boxing allows to set the following properties This check box activates and deactivates the field boxing When the box is checked the field gets boxed when it is unchecked the field does not get boxed Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Distance between boxes Width of boxes Only digits 4 4 2 3 Chapter 4 Forms Development The distance between the boxes for the individual characters measured in Points Default value is 1 5 pt The width of a box for the individual characters measured in Points Default value is 11 3 pt Note As the default value for the width of boxes is not connected to the font size defined in the stylesheet it is important to make sure that the width of the boxes is sufficient when larger fonts sizes are used As a rule of thumb use the value of the
338. s no length set or the value is 0 the entry field is set to a length of 8 characters This value is also carried forward to the Length property With the boxing type Digits and sign an additional box is added which is reserved for the minus sign The boxing type Only 2 has no effect on the number of characters Date fields Date fields are specialized entry fields to enter date and time They also allow you to specify date ranges The Date field tool creates a field which allows displaying and entering date and time After selecting the tool a cursor with a Date field element in default size appears see Fig 4 67 Assigned to the Date field tool is a date field 96 pt wide and 12 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Dt and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first text field placed in a form has therefore the name Dt000 In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 68 the first date field of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 68 Newlycreateddate field Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help O84 7 2 Oo e XBR Aam mT Preview 20 4 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 rd er ea 320 340 360 380 400 fi fi B E ES ja E a D io e 12 ay B E 20
339. s property is not active the symbol may grow beyond the field s size and cover other elements of the document This property specifies in which way the data stream to be displayed in the symbol will be encoded When it is selected a drop down menu with the options Standard and Binary opens Standard is the default setting The setting Standard optimizes the encoding of character codes below 128 ASCII On the other hand the encoding of character codes above 128 is not very efficient In the Binary setting the character codes are not optimized This setting should only be used if a considerable amount of characters with code above 127 is expected because this setting substantially reduces the capacity of the code With a small amount of data up to 53 bytes a compact form of the Aztec barcode can be used which has a smaller center symbol and may have up to 4 data layers Such a symbol is smaller and should be processed faster When this property is selected a drop down menu opens with the three options Automatic Full Compact Automatic means that the symbol is automatically switched to the compact version when the amount of data is small enough and switched to the standard version when the 4 158 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Module size Error correction level Rune Read initialization Chapter 4 Forms Development amount of data increases Full means that the symbol is always displayed in the larger standard form
340. saving files Fie Edit Format Controls Yiew Tools H New form Ctrl N Open form Ctrl 0 Q Open background layer Open field layer B Save Form Ctrl S Save formas Page setup amp Print Ctrl P x Close 1 s_func_math1 qdf 2 func_math1 qdf 3 func_math2 qdf 4 infopoint qdf 5 hyperlinks qdf Exit Opens the specification window for a new form This function is explained in section 4 3 3 Opens an Open File dialog where the requested qdf document is selected If there is already a document open it will be closed first If there are unsaved changes a dialog appears asking whether the document should be saved see Fig 3 10 Opens an Open File dialog from which the background layer document in the hdt format you are searching for can be selected The background layer is created in a separate step where a PDF document is converted into a hdt file using Snapform PDF Converter If there is a document currently open it will be closed first If there are unsaved changes a dialog appears asking whether the document should be saved see Fig 3 10 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Open Field layer Save Form Save Form as Fig 3 9 The Saveas dialog Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Opens an Open File dialog from which the background layer document in the hdo format can be selected If there is already a document open it will be closed f
341. scope of this manual Further information is available from Ringler Informatik AG
342. ser moves the mouse over it An infopoint can be built up in a way that it serves an area of the form The active element itself however is small enough to not obstruct the form The Infopoint tool X creates afield where passing the mouse over it opens a text window After selecting the tool a cursor with an Infopoint in default size appears see Fig 4 156 E Assigned to the Infopoint tool is an infopoint field 12 pt wide and 12 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically 4 229 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 157 Newly created infopoint Chapter 4 Forms Development assigned a name consisting of the characters Ip and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first infopoint field placed in a form has therefore the name Ipooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 157 the first infopoint of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help OBA 7 e Oo 11 9 YRBSORanmwe R s h ES J Properties oF Info point Q Draft Preview Property a Name 0 20 40 eo so 100 120 140 100 180 200 220 240 260 280 360 Rar EPT er ea es ord re E EPET L fi Category o A Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder a Printable shod Visible Required Value Locked Left 41 2921 Top 36 236 Width 12 00 Height 12 00 Info text details Text position Position
343. sest entered by loading the license file The Browse icon located to the right of the entry field for the license key opens an Open File dialog where the license file can be specified After Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 2 5 Windows Macintosh 2 6 Chapter 2 Installation confirming the entry the file opens and the key is registered automatically It is possible that the license key has already been communicated in another way such as a text string as part of an e mail message In this case it is recommended to copy the key string onto the clipboard and then paste it by clicking on the Paste from clipboard button Confirm the entries with OK After the data is verified the Snapform Designer is activated according to the defined product level Configuring the Snapform Designer The Snapform Designer does not require any further configuration The various language versions are named Snapform Designer EN English Snapform Designer DE German and Snapform Designer FR French and can be specifically opened as follows Start Menu gt all Programs gt Snapform then select language version The installation folder contains icons for the different language versions These icons can be dragged into the dock or started from the Applications folder by double clicking on them Uninstalling The installation directory of the Snapform Designer and the Snapform Viewer contain an uninstaller To uni
344. sh environment and it behaves properly The minus sign behaves like a toggle switch Whenever it is pressed when entering a number it toggles the number from positive to 4 79 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 60 Numeric field cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development negative and vice versa The minus sign does not need to be entered at the beginning of the entry The minus sign too is stored internally as symbolic minus sign and it is displayed according to the environment settings Note Numeric fields have a limited number of digits which can be processed This limit is at 16 significant digits and has technical reasons practically all available software has this limitation too If within calculations more than 16 significant digits are used small errors may propagate to subsequent results The Numeric field tool creates a field which allows displaying and entering numbers After selecting the tool a cursor with a Numeric field element in default size appears see Fig 4 60 l Assigned to the Numeric field tool is a numeric field 96 pt wide and 12 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace lt is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Nr and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first numeric field placed in a form has therefore the name nrooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 61 the first text field of the form has b
345. sh size Chapter 4 Forms Development Value Rc000 Default 10 lt 1976 2007 Ringler Informatik AG Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace Form Page 1 The length and the width of the rectangle can be changed by dragging the anchor points of the bounding box The position of the rectangle can also be changed by grabbing and dragging When passing an anchor point the cursor changes to double arrows which indicate the moving direction of the anchor point When grabbing and pressing the mouse button the cursor changes to an outlined arrow The other features of the rectangle are controlled in the Properties window see Fig 4 28 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 28 Properties ofa rectangle Name Category Stylesheet Chapter 4 Forms Development Properties of Rectangle Property Value Mame Fco Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Left Top Width Height Color Border width Is oval Dash size The name of the rectangle in the document This name can be changed Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid Stylesheet valid for t
346. signer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 25 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 26 Category Short description Arguments Chapter 5 Expression language reference match string regex replaceAll orig_string regex replace_with see func_regex qdf Floor x Math function Rounds the entered value to the next smaller integer x numeric any value numeric Returns the entered value rounded down to the next smaller integer This is at least for positive numbers the equivalent to cutting off the digits after the decimal sign Trunc x Round x Ceil x Cover x see func_math1 qdf getBytes string String function Encodes the entered character sequence to a byte sequence which can be passed to a 2D barcode using the encoding Binary string numeric any value Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Result Explanation See also Example 5 3 27 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference Byte sequence Converts the string passed as argument to a byte sequence which can be used to create a 2D barcode using the encoding Binary The conversion uses the UTF 8 character set encoding The byte sequence created with this function can be further compressed using the function Compress x Note The ISO 8859 1 character set encoding used in earlier Sn
347. simple entry field into which the URL can be entered Besides links to external places which are controlled with the URL property the hyperlink tool also offers the possibility to create links within the form This property is used for such internal links When this property is selected a drop down list containing all the elements of the form layer all elements with a taborder value greater than 0 including Image fields and labels The elements are grouped to the document s pages which means that elements with multiple occurrences can be individually targeted see Fig 4 153 A field can now be selected The document hyperlinks qdf see Fig 4 154 Draft mode and Fig 4 155 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows various examples of hyperlinks After selecting the Field elements in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties 4 227 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 154 Table examples from hyperlinks qdf in Draft mode Fig 4 155 Examples from hyperlinks qdfin the Snapform Viewer Chapter 4 Forms Development Editor Draft He 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 4 Hyperlinks 4 bttpZivww snapform com L4 mailto info snapform com E Click here to register 4 Howto keep a newbie busy for hours e200 hyperlinks qdf Snapform Viewer S Hyperlinks 14 http www snapform com 2 ma
348. sis d multiple lines Horizontal alignment This property defines how the text is horizontally aligned in the entry field When the property field is clicked a drop down menu appears with the options left center right which places the text left aligned centered or right aligned within the entry field Default is left Multiline text fields and Password fields do not honor this property 4 70 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Configure boxing Fig 4 50 Boxed entry field in Draft mode Fig 4 51 Segmented entry field in Preview mode Link to object Chapter 4 Forms Development This property boxes the entry field and creates for example a comb field A boxed field is a field where single characters or groups of characters are placed together into boxes which have a certain distance from each other This kind of fields is often used for evaluations in paper based workflows where forms are filled out by hand and it is said to be friendly to OCR systems As opposed to the frequently used method to create fields of their own for individual boxes segmented fields allow entering a value in one piece which is a necessity for electronic forms such as for further calculations or connections to a back end system Clicking on in this property opens the configuration window This window is specific for each different field type and explained in the according section When an entry field gets boxed
349. space a scrollbar appears allowing to navigate within the table 4 196 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 7 1 Fig 4 133 Table container cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development The Table tool The Table container is a field which makes every field placed within its perimeter a part of the table group In the object structure these fields are one level below the other fields The table container is invisible outside of the Draft view in Preview and in the Snapform Viewer The Table tool creates a table container After selecting the tool a cursor with a table container in default size appears see Fig 4 133 ct Assigned to the Table tool is a table container 240 pt wide and 72 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Table and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first table container placed in a form has therefore the name Tableooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 134 the first table container of the form has been placed and then selected 4 197 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 134 Newly created i Snapform Designer New form table con tainer Fle Edk Formet Controls View Tools Help gioaad fe OO 11 1 YBBRaae s Property value Name Table000 Category A Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder Printable 51 4
350. ss specific spot colors are used and that good printing quality can be achieved only with these colors at 100 saturation as there will not be screened bars Type of the barcode symbol Clicking on this property opens a drop down menu with a list of the available barcode systems see Fig 4 104 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Depending on the selection of this property further properties are activated or deactivated see explanation of the according properties The following barcode symbologies are supported for a more extensive description see section 4 4 5 2 Bar 39 Code 39 Bar 39 Ext Code 39 Extended Interleaved 25 Interleaved Code 2 of 5 MSI UPC A UPC E IND 25 Industrial Code 2 of 5 Standard Code 2 of 5 MAT 25 MAT25 EAN 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 Code 128 Code 93 Code 93 Ext Code 93 Extended Code 11 Codabar PostNet Unit width cm Width of the unit bar of the barcode in centimeters This dimension influences the length of the resulting symbol When specifying this 4 133 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Unit height cm Wide unit width Bar height ratio Rotation angle Text Chapter 4 Forms Development dimension the expected printer s resolution must be taken into account Helpful Hint To calculate the approximate size in Points multiply this value by 200 and then reduce it by 10 Height of the unit bar of the barcode in centimeters This dim
351. ssible however The square zones are framed by a so called finding pattern which is also used for recognizing the orientation of the symbol The symbol requires blank space around it in order to be read properly The size and configuration including error correction information of the square zones is specified in the standards Datamatrix symbols cannot grow dynamically when the amount of data exceeds the specific value for the symbol size the next larger symbol must be selected In Snapform the symbol selection can be done automatically The Datamatrix barcode can encode 256 characters of the normal ASCII character set Using so called Extended Channels other character sets can be encoded Switching between character sets within the symbol is possible with special control characters Such a character set switch must however be supported by the application 4 174 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 122 Datamatrix barcode tool cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development According to the standard for the Datamatrix barcode it is possible to structurally chain up to 16 symbols This option is however not implemented in Snapform The Datamatrix barcode tool amp creates a field which allows displaying a Datamatrix 2D barcode After selecting the tool a cursor with a 2D barcode field in default size appears see Fig 4 122 ti Assigned to the Datamatrix barcode tool is a 2D barcode field for Datamatrix code 48
352. st always be entered the selection value may be entered if requested Clicking on for this property opens the configuration window see Fig 4 99 The configuration window consists of two text columns and a check box in the Options area When this box is checked the values of the Values column are used for the selection list The Values column also becomes accessible when this box is unchecked the Values column is locked The list values of the selection list items are entered into the Items column Each item has to be on its own line The length of the list is not limited 4 123 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Values Fig 4 100 Configuration fields for selection list with active Values list Length Link to object Chapter 4 Forms Development In the Values column the selection values associated to the list values in the Items column are specified This column is only accessible when the Include values check box is checked see Fig 4 100 Note The Items and Values column do not support HTML formatted entries This value limits the length of entered values to the according number of characters When this value is 0 there is no length limitation In many forms applications there are references to other sections of the form or to additional information With the Link to object property it is possible to create such a reference in a Snapform form When this pr
353. st form systems the essential actions Reset Print Save Submit must be individually designed and configured for each and every form In Snapform the form holds the information concerning how the functionality should be supported and the Snapform Viewer provides it In the Command buttons area the functionality the form shall support is selected In order to use the functionality the form may need the according right checking the according box in the Options area see section 4 8 3 2 When this box is checked the Snapform Viewer displays the Clear entries button When this button is clicked in the Snapform Viewer the form is reset When this box is checked the Snapform Viewer displays the Save button When this box is checked the Save as check box becomes inactive When this button is clicked in the Snapform Viewer the form is saved under its same name When this box is checked the Snapform Viewer displays the Save as button When this box is checked the Save check box becomes inactive When this button is clicked in the Snapform Viewer the form is saved under a different name which may be proposed by the form or freely specified by the user When this box is checked the Snapform Viewer displays the Import data button When this button is clicked in the Snapform Viewer data will be imported into the form 4 272 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Export data Verify Sign Print Send data Chapter 4
354. start count getBytes string 4 5 2 2 Chapter 4 Forms Development Returns the first count characters counted from the right of the string string Example see func_string1 qdf Creates a substring beginning at character position start and with length count Example see func_string1 qdf Returns the position of pattern in the string string beginning with the search from position start_position Example see func_string2 qdf Removes preceding and trailing spaces from a string Example see func_string2 qdf Creates a sub sequence of the byte sequence byte_array beginning with byte number start and the number of count bytes Example see func_string2 qdf Encodes the entered character sequence to a byte sequence which can be passed to a 2D barcode using the encoding Binary Example see func_string2 qdf Regular Expression functions Regular Expression functions are an extension of string functions and are used to analyze strings against a pattern defined as a Regular Expression The following functions are part of the group of Regular Expression functions 4 246 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual find string regex start match string regex replaceAll orig_string regex replace_with 4 5 2 3 Abs x Max x y Min x y Sin x Chapter 4 Forms Development Finds the position of the first occurrence of a match after position start of the pattern defined in regex within the entered value
355. stating that the tags were not correct This is due to a somewhat too Strict syntax checking done by the Snapform Designer It is recommended to accept the modifications with Yes and then verify in the Preview mode whether the HTML code is properly interpreted This message is more likely to appear with lists and tables This property specifies how the text is displayed in relationship to the infopoint field This allows good control over which parts of the form are covered by the appearing info text Clicking on the property opens a drop down menu with the selection shown in Fig 4 161 4 235 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 161 drop down menu with text positions for the infopoint field Fig 4 162 Text positions of info point fields Chapter 4 Forms Development Position right top aligned Position right top aligned Position bottom left aligned Position left top aligned Position bottom right aligned Position left bottom aligned Position top right aligned Position top left aligned Position right bottom aligned Position specifies which border of the infopoint field the info text is placed Aligned specifies which border of the infopoint field the info text is aligned Fig 4 162 shows the eight possible options NOM BWN 1 2 3 4 Infotext Infotes Infotest Infotex Infotext Infotext Infotext gt Infotext Infotext Infotext Infotext Infotaxt Infotest Infotext Infotext Infotext
356. suitable background image available in the hdt format or the chances that the base layout will be frequently changed in the future it is recommended to start from a completely blank document Note t is always possible to add a background to an existing form see section 4 3 4 2 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 14 New form without background layer Page size Orientation Fig 4 15 drop down Menu Orientation Actual size Chapter 4 Forms Development When the option Form without background image is selected the Create new form dialog has 5 parameters available see Fig 4 14 Create new form Form with background layer File Form without background layer Page size 150 a5 Orientation Portrait Actual size 148 0 x 210 0 mm Number of pages 1 v C Use background color Color Common properties Secure QDF S compact binary format rat Stylesheet library e File Format This drop down menu contains a comprehensive list of paper sizes from all over the world This drop down menu contains a list of the available page orientations see Fig 4 15 Orientation Portrait Portrait Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape The options Reverse portrait and Reverse landscape are intended for places where both sides of the paper are going to be printed Dimensions of the selected paper size This field cannot be edited S
357. t lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name values gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs Sequence gt lt xs element ref value maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name snapform gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element ref id gt lt xs element ref values gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name Keywords gt 6 7 Chapter 6 Snapform Designer 5 x Snapform File Formats User Manual lt xs complexType mixed true gt lt xS Sequence gt lt xS any processContents skip maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs attribute name URL type xs string use optional gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name Metadata gt lt xs complexType gt lt xS Sequence gt lt xS any processContents skip maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs sequence gt lt xS attribute name URL type xs string use optional gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name Data gt lt xs complexType gt lt xS Sequence gt lt xs element ref snapform gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs attribute name URL type xs string use optional gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name Form gt lt xs complexType mixed true gt lt xS Sequence g
358. t lt xS any processContents skip maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs attribute name URL type xs string use optional gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name Attachment gt lt xs complexType mixed true gt lt xS sequence gt lt xS any processContents skip maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs attribute name Name type xs string use required gt lt xs attribute name Timestamp type xs string use optional gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name Attachments gt lt xs complexType gt lt xS Sequence gt lt xs element ref Attachment gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name QDFA gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs all gt Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual lt xs element lt xs element lt xs element lt xs element lt xs element lt xs all gt Chapter 6 Snapform File Formats ref Keywords minOccurs 0 gt ref Metadata minOccurs 0 gt ref Data minOccurs 0 gt ref Form minOccurs 0 gt ref Attachments minOccurs 0 gt lt xs attribute name version type xs string use optional gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs schema gt Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 7 Chapter 7 API and Toolkits API and Toolkits An API as well as Toolkits are available Their documentation is outside of the
359. t being part of the first the leftmost column The first parameter of the selector which can be set is its distance from the table container Selector distance Its default value of 2 Pt is common and generally usable The second parameter for the selector is the number of the first row in the table Start numbering at Normally this value is 1 so that the rows are numbered in ascending order beginning with 1 This value can however be set to any integer The size and relative position to the row can be controlled by placing a very narrow label with the requested height and position of the selector as leftmost element in the table container as it is shown in the sample document table_selectors qdf see Fig 4 140 Draft mode and Fig 4 141 Preview mode 4 210 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 140 Sizeandposition of the selectorin Draft mode Draft Preview Fig 4 141 Sizeandposition of the selector in Preview mode 240 280 320 360 400 440 480 520 560 ze and position of the selector 1 Table 000 Label Lb000 Height 13 Pt Position aligned with bottom border of text field Tx001 Height 60 Pt 2 Table001 Label Lb001 Height 21 7 Pt Position centered with text field Tx000 Height 60 Pt 3 Table 002 Label Lb002 Height 60 Pt Position aligned with top border of text field Tx00
360. tart URL m Release string ES Current status Release status lt a Ea fj S Allow to change 7 Allow to change A RDI g Metad a a 2 Serverside Interaction a Allow to print Allow to print values only Allow to save Allow to save as Allow saving to QDF S format Allow saving to QDF A format Allow XML Export Allow XML Import Allow binary export Allow binary import Allow to print incomplete form Allow to print invalid Form Import compatible data only Allow eFiling Allow to print Allow to print values only Allow to save Allow to save as Allow saving to QDF S Format Allow saving to QDF A format Allow XML Export Allow XML Import Allow binary export Allow binary import Allow to print incomplete Form Allow to print invalid Form Import compatible data only Allow eFiling Allow eFiling incomplete Form Allow eFiling invalid Form Allow eFiling inval Allow eSignature V Allow eSignature Expiry date Cee 0S KS KS SS SO SO KK SSI The Serverside interaction dialog contains the information for releasing and the settings state for the form before and after the release This check box is the main switch for the server side interacti
361. ted It gets activated when the Part of macro property is activated It is however optional and only needed when required by the actual application This property indicates how many symbols there are in the chained group to which the symbol belongs 4 171 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Macro unit number Chapter 4 Forms Development Valid values are between 2 and 127 The value 1 or 0 means the group consists of one single symbol and therefore the symbol is self contained This property is normally deactivated It gets activated when the Part of macro property is activated This property represents the index number of the symbol in the chained group Valid values are between 1 and 127 The value 0 means that the symbol is not part of a chained group The value of this property must also be smaller than the value of the Macro units count property This property is normally deactivated It gets activated when the Part of macro property is activated The document pdf417 qdf see Fig 4 120 Draft mode and Fig 4 121 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows various examples of PDF 417 barcodes After selecting the barcode fields in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the expression if there is any 4 172 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 120 Examp
362. ted compressed and open When Secure QDF S is selected the file will be completely encrypted and compressed when it is saved This leads to the smallest possible file size but requires a Snapform application to read the data When Open QDF A is selected the payload of the file will be saved in the clear in XML form layout and background layer will be compressed in any case This leads to slightly bigger files It is however possible to read the data without any Snapform applications e g with a Document Management System The preferred variety depends on the planned workflow for the forms and must be decided on a case by case level It is possible to store field properties of fields and other form elements in a stylesheet This stylesheet can be directly included when the form is created With this all properties defined in the stylesheet are automatically selected as default for any newly placed elements Stylesheets are explained in section 4 7 Clicking on the button opens a File Open dialog which allows to select the according file With these options set the new form is specified and it can be created by clicking on the Create button Document pages Forms are page oriented Snapform Designer provides functions which allow you to manage pages in forms Pages can be added and removed and pages have a set of properties In multiple page forms each page may have its own unique page properties Snapform Design
363. ted in the stylesheet editor The Stylesheet editor The Stylesheet editor see Fig 4 168 is started with the Stylesheet editor in the Tools menu Stylesheet editor List of stylesheets Properties General settings Input controls amp labels Infopoint and hyperlinks Tables 2 Default 9 3 Default 10 default 11 Default 10 Date format Midiyy Font settings Font name lt SansSerif gt viene eal Font style Plain x Font size 14 Def 4 Bold r on Addfont_ Delete font 16 Default 18 Bold PRIE TER 17 Default 8 Italic in 7 ult 9 Italic 19 Default 10 Italic 20 Default 11 Italic 21 Default 12 Italic Default color E Alpha 22 Default 14 Italic 23 Default 16 Italic Mouse over color IM lt alpha 24 Default 18 Italic Onfocuscoor I C Aho Border width 1 Border settings Border fading lt Checkboxes Symbol for checkboxes new cone delete The Stylesheet editor provides four settings tabs for a completely specified stylesheet The General settings contain fonts base date format and general border settings for fields 4 258 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Chapter 4 Forms Development In the List of stylesheets on the left side all stylesheets in the current document are listed The stylesheets with Default in their names are default stylesheets and are part of any newly created form In earlier versions of
364. ter is explained in the following section Conversion Service The Conversion Service provided by Ringler Informatik AG is available free of charge to all registered users of the Snapform Designer PDF Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 Chapter 4 Forms Development documents are sent to Ringler Informatik AG and the converted documents will be returned normally within 1 business day Note The original documents sent to the Conversion Service are deleted at Ringler Informatik AG after a successful conversion The converted documents are deleted after a certain period usually 10 business days These documents are not made available to third parties in any way The Snapform PDF Converter The Snapform PDF Converter is an application on its own which converts PDF documents into the Snapform background format hdt The Snapform PDF Converter can convert a single document or all documents in a given folder by using its batch processing capabilities The Snapform PDF Converter is a Windows application based on the NET framework Its installation is explained in section 2 3 3 Preparing the PDF documents The Snapform PDF Converter can process documents of any PDF version up to 1 6 corresponding to Acrobat 7 compatible Most documents can be processed without any further preparation However it does make sense to prepare the PDF documents before running the conversion The preparation will occur in Acrobat
365. th infopoints or an additional page which is accessed either by using hyperlinks or categories which are made visible using a check box The user still accesses the information via infopoints background information on form level The fourth level of the help system covers fundamental background issues about the form such as legal background etc When using this information the form is left behind This level will only be used when an extended interest in the topic has to be covered or when special cases must be treated Elements to access the fourth level can either be open and always accessible or hidden and revealed with the third or maybe second level In Snapform the fourth level is implemented either with hyperlinks see section 4 4 8 1 or with links embedded in HTML encoded info texts see section 4 4 8 2 4 242 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 5 4 5 1 Chapter 4 Forms Development Actions and logic The two biggest advantages of electronic forms versus paper based forms is that it is possible to add intelligence to the form and to make it interactive This is normally done using an expression language or a programming language Snapform uses an expression language which is closely related to the one used in certain spreadsheets The difference between expression languages and programming languages reveals itself in the amount of control structures and functions Expression languages have fewer On th
366. the current date it is possible to use the value in date_first or date_second the function Today calcHours date_first date_second calcMinutes date_first date_second addDay date_value number Date year month day getDay date_value other date functions see func_date qdf calcHours date_ first date second Date function Calculates the number of hours between the entered dates date_first valid date and or time date_second valid date and or time numeric integer Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Explanation See also Example 5 3 12 Category Short description Arguments Result Chapter 5 Expression language reference Returns the number of hours between the two dates date_first and date_second The entered values can be either in the future or the past A positive result means that date_second is later than date_first a negative result means that date_second is earlier than date_first For calculations with the current date it is possible to use the value in date_first or date_second the function Today If the entered data is formatted as date the same time will be used in both cases The result is in such a case always a multiple of 24 When the entered data contains time information the actual hours between the values are considered calcDays date_first date_second calcHours date_first date_second addMinute time_value number Date year month day getMinute time_val
367. the most important syntax elements for building Regular Expressions For a more in depth discussion of Regular Expressions we recommend the book by Jeffrey Friedl Mastering Regular Expressions 2nd Edition Jeffrey E F Friedl O Reilly and Associates 2002 Amazon Link Overview table Syntaxelement Matches Character xX The character x The Backslash character on The character with Octal value on 0 lt n lt 7 onn The character with Octal value onn 0 lt Nn lt 7 omnn Thhe character with Octal value omnn 0 lt m lt 3 0 lt N lt 7 xhh The character with Hexadecimal value oxhh uhhhh The character with Unicode Hexadecimal value oxhhhh t The Tab character u0009 n The Line Feed character uoo0a r The Carriage Return character uo00D f The Form Feed character uo00c a The Bell character u0007 e The Escape character u001B cx The Control character entsprechen x Character groups abc a b or c simple Group Aabc Any character except a b or c Negation a zA Z a to z or a to z Range a d m p atod ormtop a dm p Union Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual a z amp amp def a z amp amp bc a Z amp amp Am p d D s S w W ptLower ptUpper pf ASCll p Alpha p Digit p Alnum p Punct p Graph pt Print p Blank p Cntrl p XDigit ptSpace Chapter 5 Expression language reference a e or Inte
368. the result of a calculation not when data is manually entered After a calculation there may be more digits after the decimal sign than wanted which may disturb the display of numbers It is therefore reasonable to show rounded values With this property the rounding behavior is set When this property is selected a drop down menu appears with the various options see Fig 4 63 Mo rounding Mo rounding The default is No Rounding which means that entered and displayed numbers are not rounded When one of the following options Round to 0 Round to 1 Round to 01 Round to 05 Round to 001 Round to 0001 is selected the entered and displayed numbers will be rounded to the according precision The option Integer means that only integers are accepted and that entering and displaying of a decimal sign is not possible Note As calculations are done at full precision there may be discrepancies between the displayed results and the calculations based on the rounded values This is a consequence of error propagation and must be taken into account for any specific application lfnecessary the calculation must be adjusted in the way that numbers in the expression are rounded using Round x and the calculation is consistently done with rounded numbers knowing that the result may not be exact Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Always negative Minimum value Maximum value Configure boxing Chapter 4 Forms Developme
369. ting services On the processing side a suitable document and archival management system is necessary The technical and organizational requirements depend on internal and external legal guidelines The forms can again support these systems with their unique ID and the metadata Thanks to their XML structure Snapform forms can be relatively easily integrated with most document management and archival systems Also for this task Ringler Informatik AG can provide the necessary support 4 284 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 5 User Manual Expression language reference 5 Expression language reference This chapter describes the elements of the expression language formula language in detail The starting point is the expression editor see Fig 5 1 where the three zones Functions Operators and Constants are covered Fig 5 1 The Expression editor Edit formula Formula Yariables Operators Functions LLL Constants Functions A x y String manipulation A TRUE Page 1 4 x y Strix FALSE Im_HeaderPagel x y Len x pi Titlel x Left string count e Lb007 x Right string count Nr_Number x 3y SubStr string start count Lb009 x yY InStr string pattern start_position Lb010 x lt gt y TrimStr string Lb008 F x gt lt gt v Description Returns the string representation of the value of argument The us
370. tion Installing the Snapform Designer The most recent installer of the Snapform Designer can be downloaded from the Snapform website http www snapform com Note that the Snapform Designer can be installed with User privileges and does not require any Administrative privileges The Windows version of the Snapform Viewer is a exe file After downloading the installation wizard can be started at any time by double clicking on the exe file The installation steps are defined in the wizard and are self explanatory When the installation routine has successfully completed the Snapform Designer is ready to run The Macintosh version of the Snapform Designer is available as disk image in the dmg format After mounting the disk image double click the installer icon to start the installation The installation steps are self explanatory When the installation routine has successfully completed the Snapform Designer is ready to run Installing the Snapform Viewer The most recent installer of the Snapform Viewer can be downloaded from the Snapform web site http www snapform com Note that the Snapform Viewer can be installed with User privileges and does not require any Administrative privileges The Windows version of the Snapform Viewer is a exe file After downloading the installation wizard can be started at any time by double clicking the exe file The installation steps are defined in the wizard and are self expl
371. ubmitted the entire text gets transferred In order to make sure that all the text is displayed to the user the number of lines must therefore be limited Note A multiline text field does not insert automatic line breaks The text will therefore be scaled in the same way as with regular text fields Therefore make sure that when entering text manual line breaks are inserted This property controls the behavior of the field when only one single line of text is entered Normally and also when entering text it is aligned to the top border of the field When this box is checked the text is centered even if it consists of only one line This ensures that with fields with a low number of lines particularly in tables a more harmonic presentation of the text Numeric fields Numbers can also be entered into regular text fields Numeric fields offer however a wider range of controlling the entries In addition numeric fields display numbers normally right aligned which simplifies the work with tabular forms Numeric fields accept only the numbers form O to 9 the decimal character according to the language version of the Snapform Designer and the Locale settings of the computer and the minus sign The decimal sign is stored internally as a symbolic decimal sign This ensures that it gets displayed correctly according to the language settings A form saved in a German environment will be correctly displayed when opened in an Engli
372. ue other date functions see func_time qdf calcMinutes date_ first date_second Date function Calculates the number of minutes between the entered dates date_first valid date and or time date_second valid date and or time numeric integer Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Explanation See also Example 5 3 13 Category Short description Arguments Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference Returns the number of minutes between the two dates date_first and date_second The entered values can be either in the future or the past A positive result means that date_second is later than date_first a negative result means that date_second is earlier than date_first For calculations with the current date it is possible to use the value in date_first or date_second the function Today If the entered data is formatted as date the same time will be used in both cases The result is in such a case always a multiple of 24 When the entered data contains time information the actual minutes between the values are considered calcDays date_first date_second calcHours date_first date_second addHour time_value number Date year month day getHour time_value other date functions see func_time qdf Ceil x Math function Rounds the entered value to the next greater integer x numeric any value Result numeric Returns the entered value rounded up to the next greater integer
373. ue The default value is 200 Points Depending on the original document and the way the PDF has been created there may be very complex vector paths Converting such paths may involve considerable computing power and increase the resulting file size This parameter suppresses the conversion of complex graphic elements where the number of nodes is beyond the entered threshold value The threshold value s Maximum subelements count default is 750 nodes By selecting Objects as bounds it is also possible to suppress the bounding path of the graphic object When this option is selected the graphic object will not be converted in any way Converting a single document After having been prepared the PDF document can be opened in the Snapform PDF Creator with the menu item File gt Open PDF file After a few moments the converted document appears in the Preview window where it can be checked and then saved Batch conversion If there are several PDF documents to be converted it is recommended to use the batch conversion feature The prepared documents to be converted are collected in a specific directory Batch conversion gt Convert PDF files opens the batch conversion dialog see Fig 4 10 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 10 Batch conversion window with open Select directory dialog Chapter 4 Forms Development u PDF batch conversion to Snapform background layer files hdt Seg Source files pd
374. ult logical test comparison operation value_if_true Return value if the comparison operation returns TRUE the format of the return value is determined by the value itself value_if_false Return value if the comparison operation returns FALSE the format of the return value is determined by the value itself numeric This function executes a comparison operation on the operands which can be expressions themselves and returns if its result is TRUE the value value_if_true When the comparison results in FALSE the function returns the value value_if_false These return values can be expressions as well Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual See also Example 5 3 46 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation See also Example Chapter 5 Expression language reference The type of the return values value_if_true and value_if_false should be the same string or numeric or boolean in order to avoid potential conflicts with field types Comparison operators section 5 2 7 to section 5 2 14 see func_misc qdf importData url Special functions Imports a data file from url url valid URL The field name field value pairs defined in the imported file are loaded into the form This function is used to import data from external sources URLs These files have to be called from a valid path url This function supports essentially all URI protocols http https file ftp etc The i
375. used in which the according number of check box fields is placed These check boxes have now become radio buttons according to the definition above Check box In Snapform check boxes are displayed in the default view as squares and the character for checked is a cross This character is fixed and cannot be changed The size of the character depends on the field size lf however the check box checking is the result of a calculation the cross is displayed somewhat smaller The Check box tool creates a check box After selecting the tool a cursor with a check box in default size appears see Fig 4 84 a 4 103 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 85 Newly created check box Chapter 4 Forms Development Assigned to the Check box tool is a check box 12 pt wide and 12 pt high Clicking the mouse places it on the workspace It is automatically assigned a name consisting of the characters Cb and a three digit consecutive number beginning with 000 The first check box placed in a form has therefore the name cbooo In the object structure it is added to the according page In Fig 4 85 the first check box field of the form has been placed and then selected Snapform Designer New form File Edit Format Controls View Tools Help aooaa J fe oO 1 9 YRBBRame B t 4K F O _ Q Draft Preview Property Value Name cbo00 Jo 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 180 180 200 220 240 280 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 42
376. using the form such as the configuration of the action buttons but also the premises for embedding into workflows and preparations for archiving These settings are done in the Form settings window This window opens with the menu item Tools gt Form settings The Form settings consists of 7 dialogs which are selected from the selection list at the left border of the window These dialogs are explained in the following As the default settings in these dialogs are essentially empty fields this configuration must be completed for each form Note The results of the configuration settings must be verified in the Snapform Viewer because the Snapform Designer cannot display certain functions Note Some settings must also be used in conjunction with server configurations References to server side applications their functions and configurations are beyond the scope of this manual For these functionalities we refer you to the manuals for those systems General General settings see Fig 4 172 is the dialog which is displayed when the Form settings window opens The window is subdivided into different zones General Templates Printing and File format 4 265 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 172 The Form settings General window 4 8 2 1 Form ID Version Home URL Home eMail Chapter 4 Forms Development Templates Save form as a template your file will be saved with qdft ext
377. using this property its appearance changes in Draft mode see Fig 4 50 as well as in the Preview mode see Fig 4 51 Multiline text fields and Password fields do not honor this property In many forms applications there are references to other sections of the form or to additional information With the Link to object property it is possible to create such a reference in a Snapform form When this property is selected a drop down list containing all the elements of the form layer all elements with a taborder value greater than 0 including Image fields which can be selected When the form is 4 71 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 52 Arrow icon besides a field with Link to object 4 4 2 2 Fig 4 53 Text field cursor Chapter 4 Forms Development filled out a green arrow mark appears at the right of the field see Fig 4 52 Clicking on this icon sets the focus to that referenced field The other properties specified in the Properties window are specific for the actual type of entry field and are explained in the appropriate sections Text fields Text fields are entry fields for any kind of unformatted text which fits on a single line for multiline text fields see section 4 4 2 3 The Text field tool creates a field which allows displaying and entering text After selecting the tool a cursor with a Text field element in default size appears see Fig 4 53 TO pit Assigned to the Text fie
378. value and other date functions see func_date qdf Exp x Math function Calculates the value of the exponential function e x numeric any value numeric greater than 0 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Explanation See also Example 5 3 24 Category Short description Arguments Result Explanation Chapter 5 Expression language reference Calculates the value of the exponential function e for the entered value and returns the result For arguments greater than 0 the result is greater than 1 arguments smaller than 0 lead to results between 0 and 1 e leads to the value 1 The inverse function is Log x Log x see func_math2 qdf find string regex start Regular Expression function Finds the position of the first occurrence of a match after position start of the pattern defined in regex within the entered value string string String regex Regular Expression start optional position integer beginning with O numeric integer between 0 and length of string 1 or 1 Finds the position of the first match after the starting position start of the pattern defined in regex within the entered value string The result is the position or if there is no match 1 The numbering of positions begins with 0 When the argument start is missing the search for a match starts by default with position 0 An overview over the Regular Expression syntax can be found in section 54 Snapform De
379. w Depending on the active control and the current selection the Properties window see Fig 3 23 for a representative example displays different information Properties of Multiline text field Property Value Name miooo Category Stylesheet Default 10 Taborder 10 Printable visible Required Fj value Locked Oo Left 48 0978 Top 31 7935 width 96 00 Height 46 2857 Read only oO Single use field oO Tooltip text Number of lines 0 Center single line oO Link to object The Properties window displays property name property value pairs Depending on the property the value is entered in a text or a numeric field activated with a check box or selected from a drop down list With some properties such as Value a new specific editing window opens Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 3 2 7 3 2 7 1 Fig 3 24 Object structure of the form 3 2 7 2 Chapter 3 Using the Snapform Designer Tools window The Tools window is used to display additional information and tools Clickable tabs display the object structure a tool set or a Search Replace window Controls When Controls is selected the Tools window displays the object structure of the form see Fig 3 24 This is the default view of the Tools window Tools Controls Tools Find amp replace The object structure is hierarchical When elements contain other elements an opening icon appears Clicking on this icon opens and c
380. weight and dimensions of the container These blocks start with a so called Application Identifier which is followed by a specific number of characters The Application Identifiers are defined in the standards It can represent all 127 7 bit ASCII characters Three character sets are available Switching between them within the code is possible after specific control characters The character sets consist of the following characters e Character set A numbers upper case letters control and special characters e Character set B numbers upper and lower case letters e Character set C double digits Valid characters 0123456789 Space ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ amp 27 lt gt _ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz plus non displayable control characters Application logistics particularly as EAN 128 and many other applications 4 142 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Code 93 and Code 93 Ext Code 11 Codabar Postcode Chapter 4 Forms Development This is an expansion and extension of Code 39 which allows you to represent the complete 7 bit ASCII character set with Code 93 extended These codes are opposed to Code 39 continuous which results in a somewhat higher density The code contains check sums which are not displayed in the clear text line Valid characters 0123456789 Space ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ oe Additionally in Code 93 Ext 1 amp lt gt _ abcdefg
381. wer to perform a Save as with a different file name Pure binary format Data can be read only via API for a format description see the documentation for the API Form Tempate open QDF A qdft Open Snapform Template format Only the form description is compressed and encrypted data and metadata are displayed in an open XML form Reading and writing data does not require any specific tools The Template format forces the Snapform Viewer to perform a Save as with a different name The format description is identical with the description of the standard QDF A format see section 6 2 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 6 5 File extension Explanation Format description 6 6 File extension Explanation Format description 6 7 File extension Explanation Chapter 6 Snapform File Formats Background layer hdt File format of the Background layer which has been created from a PDF document using the Snapform PDF Converter When opening a Field layer file in the Snapform Designer a new document is created Pure binary format Data can be read only via API for a format description see the documentation for the API Field layer hdo File format of the Field layer which can be exported from the Snapform Designer When opening a Field layer file in the Snapform Designer a new document is created Pure binary format Data can be read only via API for a format description se
382. ws Allow growth Hide selector Row height Selector distance Scrollbar distance Header text Stark numbering at Configure table Name The name of the table container in the document This name can be changed Category Assignment to one or several categories which allows you to build groups of elements Clicking this field opens the Categories dialog see Fig 4 23 The categories are selected by clicking on the according check box With OK the selection becomes valid 4 199 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Stylesheet Taborder Printable Visible Required Value Locked Chapter 4 Forms Development Stylesheet valid for the element When there is no explicit stylesheet selection the first default stylesheet is used For tables the stylesheet settings in the Tables tab are of great importance Sequence number of the element in the tab order This value is assigned automatically and is in the order of the field tab sequence beginning with 10 and incremented in steps of 10 The first field of the form has tab order value 10 the second the value 20 etc The tab order value can be changed so that a specific tabbing sequence can be created which has no relationship with the order the fields have been added With tables make sure that the table container has the lowest taborder number of the whole table group This check box is unchecked and cannot be changed Table containers are never printed When th
383. xt IND 25 Chapter 4 Forms Development to the standards and technical descriptions of the according code will be necessary in many situations This is Code 39 also known as 3 of 9 or USD 3 A character is represented through 9 bars where 3 are wide This symbology is said to be the oldest alphanumeric barcode Code 39 is a discrete symbology with variable length It is to some extent self checking as a simple printing error cannot change a symbol into another valid symbol Valid characters 0123456789 Space ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ oe Application industry health military A check character modulo 43 can be specified as an option This is the Code 39 extended or Full ASCIl Code 39 It is based on the Code 39 but allows displaying all 7 bit ASCII character by combining characters of the Code 39 character set Valid characters 0123456789 Space ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWKXYZ amp 4 27 lt gt _ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz plus non displayable control characters Application industry health military A check character modulo 43 can be specified as an option This is the Industrial 2 of 5 or Standard 2 of 5 code a low density numeric code A character is represented with 5 black bars 2 of which are wide The white space has no information content and its purpose is to separate the black bars This is one of the oldest numeric codes The 2 of 5 code is a discrete symbology with variable
384. xt The font type and size used for the text is controlled via the stylesheet used for the column field For the report title and the column header a suitable stylesheet must be selected Style for report title and Style for report headers The Default stylesheet is applied by default The report will be added if not specified otherwise after the last page of the form When it should appear at another place in the form select the page after which it should appear in the Print report after page property Finally specify by clicking on the according radio button the page orientation whether the page should be printed in portrait or landscape format The row height in the report depends on the value of the Row height in the table which will be scaled proportionally to the table width This ensures that the report can display at least the same amount of information as the table in the form When the table is a phantom table only one single row is displayed in the form This means that the configuration of the table is particularly important A phantom table is configured as follows 4 213 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Fig 4 142 Button to open the data entry table zoom level very high Chapter 4 Forms Development Helpful Hint t is recommended to regularly verify the results of the actions described below in the Preview mode 1 Adjust the value of Row height to the actually needed height for a row
385. xx a control character which can be evaluated on application level and that it is used often for the indication of switching character sets This property is deactivated in the default setting The document datamatrix qdf see Fig 4 125 Draft mode and Fig 4 126 shown in the Snapform Viewer shows various examples of Datamatrix barcodes After selecting the barcode fields in the Snapform Designer the Properties window displays information about the according properties Double clicking the field opens the expression editor to display the expression if there is any 4 182 Snapform Designer 5 x Chapter 4 User Manual Forms Development Fig 4 125 Examples of DAGGIE x Draft Preview barcodes from datamatrix qdf in Draft mode S 60 2D Barcodes Datamatrix Code an 440 480 480 Fig 4 126 Examples of _ ei jatamatrix q Snapform Viewer Datamatrix BASA o mn i barcodes from pdf417 qdf in the Sn aptorm Vie wer Datamatrix is a square high density 2D matrix symbology 4 183 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual 4 4 6 5 Chapter 4 Forms Development Bcd000 Datamatrix barcode Format and Encoding automatic Bcd001 Datamatrix barcode Format automatic Encoding ASCII Bcd002 Datamatrix barcode Format automatic Encoding C40 Bcd003 Datamatrix barcode Format automatic Encoding TEXT Bcd004 Datamatrix barcode Format automatic Encoding BASE256 Bcd005 Datamatrix barco
386. y check functions Consistency check functions are used to create and verify checksums over entered data The following functions are part of the group of consistency check functions 4 253 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual checkCardNumber val ue getMod10 value checkMod10 value getMod10r value checkMod10r value 4 5 2 8 createGUID getSessionID Chapter 4 Forms Development Validates credit card numbers Example see func_consist qdf Returns a checksum created with the MOD 10 algorithm over the entered value value Example see func_consist qdf Validates number using the MOD 10 algorithm Example see func_consist qdf Returns a checksum created with the Recursive MOD 10 algorithm over the entered value value Example see func_consist qdf Validates number using the Recursive MOD 10 algorithm Example see func_consist qdf Identifier functions Identifier functions are used to create unique strings which allow an exact association with data and records The following functions are part of the group of identifier functions Creates an unique identifier GUID Global Unique Identifier Example see func_ident qdf Creates an unique identification string GUID Global Unique Identifier which can be assigned to the current working session with Snapform Viewer Example see func_ident qdf 4 254 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual getPrintID getDatalD getRan
387. ype property has been set to Full When this box is checked the Aztec barcode symbol will contain the initialization flag for the reading unit the scanner which resets some 4 159 Snapform Designer 5 x User Manual Process tilde Struct Append Chapter 4 Forms Development parameters within the reading unit This property is deactivated as default In order to represent control characters which cannot be entered via keyboard the Tilde character is used This property specifies whether the Tilde character is regarded as a control character When this box is checked the Tilde character is interpreted as a control character This has the following implications which must be taken into consideration when the encoding data stream is calculated e is replaced with the actual tilde character therefore double the Tilde character if one must get into the data stream e dxxx Is replaced with the character whose ASCII code is xxx which means that for example d065 will be replaced with A This representation is important when control characters in the lowest ASCII range are encoded e F will be replaced with the FNC1 character This is a special character which can be at the very beginning of an Aztec barcode datastream This character can only be placed at the first position of the datastream e Exxxxxx is replaced with the so called Extended Interpretation Channel flag with number xxxxxx a control character wh

Snapform Designer User Manual 5.x (English)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents